JP7427539B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display of identification information becoming a specific display result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that execute a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that can execute a group effect in which images of a plurality of characters and objects appear.

JP2019-050851A

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to enjoy the fun of the game by executing a group effect, but there is still room for improvement regarding such a group effect.

The present invention was devised in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more suitably execute a group performance.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
Reservation storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation storage,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform a group effect that displays an image of multiple characters progressing as a group,
When executing the group effect based on the first variation pattern, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a predetermined number of frames;
When executing the group effect based on the second variation pattern, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a specific number of frames different from a predetermined number of frames;
There is a first stage and a second stage with different production backgrounds,
In both the first stage and the second stage, if the specific reach suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, after the variable display starts, the variable display does not change to the specific display result. During the predetermined period until the specific display result is suggested, the group effect starts in the first half of the predetermined period .
(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
a group effect execution means for executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
The brightness data table configured with a plurality of brightness data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light includes a first brightness data table, a second brightness data table, and a third brightness data table,
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period,
The control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first brightness data table is completed, and the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the third display period. was terminated in
The control of the light emitting means by the third brightness data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is completed,
In the group effect, a predetermined animation in which the characters move in the advancing direction is displayed,
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image,
The first image is a more characteristic image representing the predetermined animation than the second image,
A display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than a display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a diagram looking into between a game board and an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. installed in a pachinko game machine. It is a figure for explaining a hit type. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each random number. It is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a production control command. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. It is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a previous variation pattern determination table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table in each preview production. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group advance notice work process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overall picture of a six-person group preview. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining display priority in a group preview performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in group preview presentation. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the form of outlines when characters overlap in a group preview performance. It is a diagram looking into the space between the game board and the image display device during execution of the group preview performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of failure in the video production process. It is a diagram showing the overall picture of the Bakuchu group preview. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in a group preview performance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a six-person group notice in stage A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a Bakuchu group notice in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group preview luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in a group preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the group preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the group preview luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in a reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of a child table in a reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for board left lamps in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for attacker lamps in the reach line brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background preview brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in a background notice luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during full light emission. It is a figure for explaining an example of a brightness data table at the time of PUSH effect. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table according to a modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group preview luminance data table according to a modification. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode of a comparative example when a six-person group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a background preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a lamp preview is executed at stage A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. 3 for explaining the production mode when the Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. It is a figure for explaining the detail of Boingo group notice. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a comparative example when a Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a comparative example when a Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group notice according to a modification is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a dog group notice according to a modified example is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a dog group notice according to a modified example is executed. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of a six-person group notice and a dog group notice. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the movement of a character (stepping version) during normal times; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the movement of a character (scroll ver.) in normal times. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the movement of a character (scroll ver.) in normal times. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the actions of characters during a group preview performance and during normal times. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the behavior of a character during normal times. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the actions of characters during a group preview performance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the actions of characters during a group preview performance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the actions of characters during a group preview performance.

[Configuration of pachinko machine, etc.]
1 and 2 are front views of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 and 2 show an arrangement layout of main components in a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

It should be noted that two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as a "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also referred to as a "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative symbols are displayed variably (for example, vertically scrolling display or (updated display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumu-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Yumu-chan is the main character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Further, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan that appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Yumu-chan is the main character, she has the highest degree of importance among all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters, including Jam-chan. Furthermore, Jam-chan has the highest degree of importance among the characters other than Yumu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Yumu-chan. Also, characters with higher priority than other characters, such as Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, are the characters that appear first, the characters that are placed in the most prominent position, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent position in the character selection scene, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent position in the character selection scene, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent positions It may be the highest ranked character among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 8). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the ball enters the second starting winning hole. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 8), and a big winning hole (as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state) by the big winning hole door. (hereinafter referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1, and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 3) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A big winning opening door is provided in the space between, and by sliding open and closing horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, the regular big winning opening with game balls is opened. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 8), game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters a normal big prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 8), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as a V big winning hole) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. (referred to as the winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the V large winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 8) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member labeled with the letters "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member labeled with the letter "2". As a result, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime, the name of a singer, etc.). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the character with the next highest priority after the main character (for example, "Yumemu-chan", the main character). ``Dreams'') may also be shown. In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 1 and a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. . Specifically, of the movable body 32, among the members labeled with the characters "POWERFUL" and the members labeled with the characters "2", only the members labeled with the characters "POWERFUL" are shown in FIG. By falling from the position shown in FIG. 2, it stops at a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Note that the movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or pressed) by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 8).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 8).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 20 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In addition, below, "lighting" and "light emission" are used to have the same or substantially the same meaning. In the special pattern LED board 20, the type of special pattern (first special pattern) in the first special pattern game and the special pattern in the second special pattern game are determined by the combination of light emitting modes such as light emission/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 5(a), which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 20, by combining light emission modes such as light emission/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of light emission modes such as light emission/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 22.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the production control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of pending memories, right hit display, etc. by emitting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by the combination of light emitting modes such as light emission/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 5(b), which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, by combining light emission modes such as light emission/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 53, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of light emission modes such as light emission/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 54.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board top lamp provided above the game board 2. The lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V grand prize opening are opened and the V winning is made. A V lamp 9G that notifies you that you are in a round of a possible jackpot game state or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and an electric chew lamp 9H provided on the stick controller 31A. the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, the frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the frame right lamp provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. and a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member included in the movable body 32 and labeled with the word "POWERFUL" is divided into four parts, and the accessory lamp 9A1 is on the back side of the "P" and "O" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is on the back side of the "P" and "O" parts. The accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A4 is placed on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) on the back side of the member labeled with the word "POWERFUL", so that "POWERFUL" lights up (emits light).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 depict the main character. are placed on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 where is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn starts to light up (light up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 2, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. On the upper side of the game board 2, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, divided into three areas: left, middle, and right. has been done. The parts of the game board 2 where the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are provided are made of a transparent material that can transmit light. When 9C1 to 9C13 light up (light up) on the back side of the upper part of the game board 2, the upper part of the game board 2 lights up (lights up) in white or red.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn. As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights out) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), the stick controller 31A lights up (emits light). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when turned on (emits light), the push button 31B is turned on (emits light).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 4) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The left side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 4) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The right side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). Note that the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chew lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, The frame right lamp 9R is also collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 8).

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 8) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps including left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L causes a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example) to emit or blink, respectively, to illuminate the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps including left frame lamps 9R2 to 9L12 running clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R causes a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example) to emit or blink, respectively, to illuminate the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the special pattern LED board 20 and the fourth pattern unit 50. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the special figure LED board 20 includes a special figure 1 variable display part 21 that shows a variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows a variable display of the second special figure. 22, a special figure 1 memory display section 23 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section 24 indicating the second pending memory number corresponding to the second special figure game. , a normal pattern memory display section 25 that shows the number of stored normal symbols, a normal pattern display section 26 that shows a variable display of normal symbols, a right hitting display section 30 that prompts the player to play right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. , a time saving display section 29 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 27 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display unit notifies the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting (light emitting) or blinking using light emitting means such as LEDs. can do.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting (light emission)/blinking/turning off the light using a light emitting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is informed by the light emitting/blinking/turning off of the light emitting means.

Further, the special pattern LED board 20 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/turning off the light by means of a light emitting means such as an LED in the right-handed hitting display section 30. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the light-emitting means such as an LED in the right-handed player display section 30 emits light, and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, that is, when the player is encouraged to play left-handed, When prompting the player to play, the light emitting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 30 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and causes the right-handed display section 30 to emit light, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , sends a right-handed display light-off designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display section 30. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may cause the right hit display section 30 to emit light only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 30.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during this time, the right-handed display section 30 urges the player to hit the ball to the right. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the fourth symbol unit 50 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 51 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol 1 memory display section 51 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game. 2 special figure 2 storage display section 52 indicating the number of reserved memory numbers, a special figure 1 variable display section 53 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. This game includes a special figure 2 variable display section 54 that shows a special figure 2 variable display section 54, and a right-hitting display section 55 that prompts the player to play right-handed. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc., by emitting/flashing/turning off light using a light emitting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by emitting/flashing/turning off the light using a light emitting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is informed by the light emitting/blinking/turning off of the light emitting means.

In the following, the variation display of the first special symbol (variable display) refers to the display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the light emitting means such as the LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 1 variable display section 53. Also called. In addition, it is also referred to as a variable display of the second special symbol (variable display) that the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting means such as an LED in the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 54. to be called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the light emitting means such as an LED in the right playing display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 emits light to remind the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the light emitting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 55 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 causes the right-handed display section 55 to emit light based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and causes the symbol to be displayed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination is made, the right-handed player display section 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed player display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may cause the right hit display section 55 to emit light only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 55 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 6 is a diagram looking into the space between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be seen. .

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending memory display area 5D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A displayable second pending storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J is displayed which indicates that the special symbol is being variably displayed and indicates the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged vertically. Moreover, the small pattern 5M is a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 7, a decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. It is located. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the screen of the image display device 5 has a rectangular or substantially rectangular shape, but as described above, the game board 2 has a cover on the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. It is fixed in a way that it covers it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7(b), when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part of the screen of the image display device 5 (particularly the edge) is not visible or is difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

[Substrate configuration]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 20, etc., solenoid drive signals). It consists of:

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the performance image, and controls the lighting/extinguishing of the game effect lamps 9. For example, the LED driver is supplied with brightness data (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) for the purpose of the LED driver. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

As will be described in detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED are mounted. The LED driver causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit/blink/extinguish the light by adjusting the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data from the performance control CPU 120. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission/blinking/lighting out of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal). It consists of an output port for

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12 and the audio control board 13, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the production control board 12, and is capable of emitting light (blinking) on each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game progresses as follows. When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special pattern game by the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 of the special pattern LED board 20 is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special pattern game by the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20 is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 and the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 produces a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot.) When a combination of light emission modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 and the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20, the light emission mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, the combination of the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20 is a predetermined special pattern (small winning pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern. ), it becomes a "small win" when the combination of light emission modes corresponding to the above is achieved. In addition, the combination of the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20 may be different from the jackpot pattern or the small winning pattern (loss pattern). When the combination of light emitting modes corresponding to the symbols) is achieved, it becomes a "lose". In addition, in the combination of the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20, a special pattern (losing pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern or the small winning pattern The light emission mode corresponding to the symbol) is also referred to as a "loss display result".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state. Note that it is not necessary to provide a small win as the win type.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by either the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). It will continue until the earliest possible time. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, a jackpot type is set for "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning game state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot playing state for some jackpot types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. Note that the presentation is performed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, etc. The effect may be performed by turning off the lights, moving the movable body 32, or using any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach, super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, and strongest reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than super reach. Moreover, even within super reach, it is divided into the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived during the normal reach. Furthermore, the jackpot reliability is higher if the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than if the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Moreover, the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived at the strongest reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived at the latter half of the super reach. Note that, hereinafter, the "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach," the "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "SP first half," and the "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "SP second half."

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a "jackpot" (the above-mentioned specific display result), a predetermined display result is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols. A determined decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a "small win", a predetermined small win combination is displayed as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5. A fixed decorative pattern (for example, "1 3 5", etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, there are times when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot types in a jackpot gaming state similar to the small winning gaming state) and when it becomes a "small winning". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special figure game is a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a "lose" (the above-mentioned lose display result), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will not be the reach mode, but the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be changed. As a display result, a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also referred to as a "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns may become a "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, during the small winning game state, and in some jackpot types (a jackpot type in a jackpot gaming state in the same manner as the small winning gaming state, for example, a jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high certainty state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Various tables regarding jackpots]
Various tables related to jackpots will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

(Win type)
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the winning types. As shown in FIG. 9, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings in the jackpot ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the three rounds of jackpot game states. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 7th round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(each random number)
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 10, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. Random 1, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, and then is updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining a post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to a post-variation among the variation patterns. The later variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the special symbol. Note that Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a loss.For example, it is updated by 1, and then added and updated from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to the winning time, and for example, is incremented and updated from 1 to 239, which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The front fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Random 5, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches the upper limit of 251, and then is updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 6, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 201, and then is updated again from 1.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) whether or not the control is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous state for the player. Then, out of the plurality of types of jackpots, which jackpot is to be determined is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

In addition, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random numbers for determining the post-variation pattern (Random 3, 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (Random 5). be done. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 11(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal time jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 11(a), and in the probability change jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set in the lower column of FIG. 11(a). Jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in . The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table when the probability is variable is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table during normal times, by adding the jackpot judgment value unique to the jackpot judgment value when the probability is variable. A larger number of jackpot judgment values than the jackpot judgment table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variable jackpot). Note that FIG. 11(a) shows the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot or the probability (proportion) of losing.

FIGS. 11(b) and 11(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 11(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 11(b) contains numerical values that are compared with the value of Random 2 for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 11(b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values out of 1 are assigned, probability variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values. random 2 values are assigned, probability variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s. is assigned a value of

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 11(c), judgment values are set as many as the number of judgment values corresponding to each of probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2. has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 11(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's are assigned, probability variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's, and probability variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's. 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned to probability variable jackpot 9.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 2 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Production control command]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main side control board, transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 12 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a previous variation (previous variation pattern) among variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation in the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the performance control CPU 101 receives the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 84XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a later variation (later variation pattern) among the variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The after variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns, there is a post-fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each post-fluctuation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variable jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variable jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variable jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variable jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variable jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variable jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variable jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variable jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the loss specification command, the normal jackpot 1 and 2 specification commands, and the probability variable jackpot 1 to 9 specification commands, or these collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start specification commands 1 to 11 or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passing designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command that indicates light emission for the right-handed player display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[Variation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, etc. will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 19.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a previous variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the previous variation, and a subsequent variation pattern, which corresponds to the subsequent variation, and the combination has different contents. It is now included. Note that the previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX(H)) explained using FIG. 12, and the after variation pattern corresponds to the after variation pattern command (84XX(H)) explained using FIG. corresponds to

(Main side pre-fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of previous variation patterns each assigned a previous variation number, the previous variation number 1 is a previous variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern for 13 seconds). It is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003(H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory item x) (a reach in which the movable body 32 does not operate although it is in a reach mode). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004(H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory object ○) (a reach in which the movable body 32 operates in a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach in a reach mode).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object x) is executed after one pseudo variation. Pseudo-variation means that after the variable display (variable display) of a decorative pattern starts until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted. This is a variable display (variable display). A performance that repeats such pseudo fluctuations is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo series, a variable display based on one suspended memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo variable displays. Note that a variable display that restarts after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as a "re-variable display." The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ◯) is to be executed after one pseudo variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ×) is executed after performing the pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ○) is to be executed after performing a pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the previous variation patterns, and an animation (moving picture) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes approximately 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1246. Furthermore, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1861.

(Main side post-variation pattern)
FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns to which post-fluctuation numbers are assigned, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo continuous sequence. Pseudo-sequence is a performance that pretends to execute a pseudo-sequence but ends up not executing the pseudo-sequence.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into an SP reach). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the second half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops in the second half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (a variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

Post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408 (H)) that specifies normal reach (win) (variation of decorative symbols that becomes a reach mode and becomes a win mode). Post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops in the second half of SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies the final reach (win) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode at the final reach).

(Determination of post-change pattern)
The post-change pattern is determined using a different random counter depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a loss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. As shown in FIG. 15, when the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 3 explained in FIG. 10. Furthermore, when it is determined that the jackpot determination is a loss, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and the determined post-variation number also differs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-change patterns from post-change numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-fluctuation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is one, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is two, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 2, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is three, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-variation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and furthermore, the post-fluctuation number is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 16, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 4 explained in FIG. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(a), if it is determined to be a normal jackpot 1 or 2, a definite variable jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8, then any one of the post variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. Post-fluctuation patterns are determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When it is determined to be either a probability change jackpot 3 or 9, one of the after fluctuation patterns is determined from among the after fluctuation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the after fluctuation patterns. . Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot is determined to be 4, one of the later variation patterns is determined from among the later variation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the later variation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, and this makes it possible to add variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 15, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 in the case of a loss, whereas Since the time is higher than that, approximately 1/1.1, it is possible for the player to expect that a jackpot will occur if the SP reach or final reach develops.

(Judgment of previous fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-fluctuation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the pre-determined post-fluctuation pattern. Further, the determined pre-variation number also differs depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17(a), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 1 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(b), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 2 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(c), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(d), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 4 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 17(e), if the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation numbers 5 or 9 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation numbers 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(f), if any one of the post variation patterns with post variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the pre variation numbers 4, 7, and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(g), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 7 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 17(h), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(i), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 8 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 6, 9, or 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(j), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 12 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the previous variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 17(g) and (h), the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 11, in which pseudo-fluctuation is performed twice, is the same as the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation numbers 7 and 11, which develops into a late SP reach. has the highest probability of being determined. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 17(i) and (j), the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 12 in which pseudo-fluctuation is performed twice is the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation numbers 8 and 12 that develops into the final reach. has the highest probability of being determined. Therefore, if the pseudo fluctuation is performed twice, the player can expect the SP to develop into a second half reach or a final reach.

(Total fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as explained in FIGS. 15 to 17, one of the variation patterns with main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 18 will be obtained.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. Furthermore, on the sub side, variation patterns of sub variation numbers 1 to 26 are determined to correspond to the variation patterns of main variation numbers 1 to 26, respectively.

[Each preview performance]
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table in each preview performance. In the present embodiment, a preview performance suggesting that the display result of the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The preview performance is also a performance that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a jackpot, or a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. The preview performance includes a group preview performance (also referred to as a group preview or group performance), an SP first half title preview performance (also referred to as an SP first half title preview), a conversation preview, and a pseudo-series (also referred to as a pseudo-series performance). It can be done.

The group preview performance is a performance that displays an image in which a plurality of objects advance as a group. The plurality of objects include anything that moves, such as characters such as people, fish, and animals, and machines such as airplanes and cars. There may be one type of object such as a character, or there may be multiple types. A pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of types of group preview presentations. Specifically, there is a six-person group preview in which six characters dressed as maids advance as a group, a Bakchu group preview in which a rat character with the body of a bomb named Bakuchu advances in a group, A Boingo group preview in which characters named Boingo move together as a group may be executed.

In the present embodiment, the group preview performance is determined whether or not it is executed in the group preview lottery when the after fluctuation number 6 to 8 or 10 to 12 is determined to be the after fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach or final reach. and the type of group preview effect to be executed.

FIG. 20(a) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery in stage A. In this embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same variation pattern, multiple types of stages are provided that have different production modes (background images, BGM, sound effects, appearing characters, etc.). . Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, stage A is a stage where a character named Yumu-chan, one of the six characters dressed as maids, performs.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), when the post-variation pattern corresponding to a loss is determined to be a post-variation pattern with post-variation numbers 6 to 8, there is a 15% probability that the group preview effect will be executed, and a 13% probability that the post-variation pattern will be 6-8. It will be decided to be a group of people's notice, and there is a 2% probability that it will be decided to be a group of Boingo's notice. In addition, if the after variation pattern corresponding to the winning number is determined to be 10 to 12, a group preview effect will be executed with an 85% probability, of which a 6 person group notice will be executed with a 55% probability, and a 30% It is decided that the Boingo group will be announced with a probability of .

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320, and the probability of being determined to the after variation pattern of after variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, when the probability of losing variation number 6 to 8 is about 1/102, The probability of being determined as a post-fluctuation pattern is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/320, and the probability of being determined to the after fluctuation pattern of after fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/1.1, it is assumed that the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/1.1. The probability of determining the post-fluctuation pattern is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 85%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the group notice is executed is approximately 64%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the group preview is not limited to 64%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot by executing it.

FIG. 20(b) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery in stage B. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, stage B is a stage where a performance is performed by a character named Bakuchu.

As shown in Fig. 20(b), if the post-variation pattern corresponding to a loss is determined to be a post-variation pattern with post-variation numbers 6 to 8, a group preview effect will be executed with a 10% probability, and an explosion will occur with an 8% probability. It will be decided to be a Chu group notice, and with a 2% probability it will be decided to be a Boingo group notice. In addition, if the after variation pattern corresponding to the winning number is determined to be 10 to 12, there is a 90% probability that a group preview performance will be executed, and among these, there will be a 60% probability that it will be determined to be a Bakuchu group notice, and 30 % probability that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice.

Here, as mentioned above, the probability that the variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 will be determined in the event of a loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, at the time of winning, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 90%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the group notice is executed is about 74%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the group preview is not limited to 74%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot by executing it.

The SP first half title preview is an effect that suggests a jackpot based on the display mode of the character image indicating the first half of the SP reach title when the SP reach is developed. In this embodiment, the display of the character image of the SP first half title is executed in both stage A and stage B, but the preview effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title is performed in stage B. Executed only on Note that even in the case of stage A, a preview effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title may be executed.

In this embodiment, when the SP first half title preview is determined to be a post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach, it is determined whether or not it is executed in the SP first half title preview lottery. , and the type of SP first half title preview to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 20(c), if the after fluctuation pattern corresponding to a loss is determined to be the after fluctuation number 6 to 8, the SP first half title preview will be executed with a 20% probability, and the after fluctuation number corresponding to a win will be executed with a 20% probability. If the variation pattern after 10 to 12 is determined, the SP first half title preview will be executed with a probability of 80%.

Here, as mentioned above, the probability that the variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 will be determined in the event of a loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed is about 20%, so the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, at the time of winning, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed is approximately 80%, so the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed at the time of winning is approximately 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the SP first half title preview is executed is approximately 56%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the SP first half title preview is not limited to 56%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot when it is executed.

In this way, the reliability (expectation level of jackpot) in the group preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability (in the case of jackpot) in the SP first half title preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B). Expectation level) was 56%, and group previews have higher reliability than SP first half title previews. Therefore, when the group preview is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title preview is executed, and the player is more likely to see the group preview being executed than the SP first half title preview. We have come to expect that.

In addition, the Boingo group notice in Stage A is only executed with a 2% probability when there is a loss, but it is executed with a 30% probability when there is a win, so when the Boingo group notice is executed, , there is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in Stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when it is a loss, but is executed with a 55% probability when it is a win, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it will not be a loss. The possibility of this is greater than the Boingo group prediction. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is more likely to see the Boingo group notice being executed than the 6-person group notice. We have come to expect that.

Similarly, the Boingo group notice in Stage B is executed with a probability of only 2% in the case of a loss, but is executed with a probability of 30% in the case of a win, so when the Boingo group notice is executed. is most likely a jackpot. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed with an 8% probability when it is a loss, but with a 60% probability when it is a win, so the Bakuchu group notice is executed. There is a greater possibility that this will be a failure than the Boingo group preview. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Bakuchu group notice is executed, and the player feels that the Boingo group notice is executed more than the Bakuchu group notice. We have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the six-person group preview in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when the game is a loss, but with a probability of 55% when the game is a win. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed with a probability of 8% when the game is a loss, but with a probability of 60% when it is a win. For this reason, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed more often at the time of a jackpot than the 6-person group preview in Stage A. As a result, when the Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group preview is executed in Stage A, and the player is People have come to expect that crowd announcements will be carried out.

Note that the reliability of the group notice at stage A and the reliability of the group notice at stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group preview in Stage A and the group preview in Stage B need only be higher in reliability than the SP first half title preview, and the Boingo group preview is higher than the 6-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview. It would be good if the reliability was high.

The conversation preview performance is a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot by suggesting that the changing symbol will become a jackpot symbol (that is, a jackpot will occur). The conversation preview performance is a performance using a conversation by characters (display of text images related to the conversation), and includes conversation previews in a plurality of types. Specifically, the conversation preview performance includes an explanation of the game nature of the game played on the pachinko gaming machine 1, an explanation of a story related to the game played on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a message (text) such as "Chance!" By displaying this, the player is made to expect that the changing symbol will become a jackpot symbol (that is, a jackpot will occur).

In this embodiment, the conversation preview effect is executed depending on which of the previous variation patterns of the previous variation numbers 4 to 12 that develop into a reach is determined by the conversation preview execution lottery. Whether or not the conversation is announced, and the type of conversation preview are determined.

As shown in FIG. 20(d), when the pre-variation patterns with pre-variation numbers 4 to 6 without pseudo-variation are determined, the conversation preview performance is executed with a probability of 60%, and each of them has a probability of 20%. , game description, story description, and "Chance!" If a pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 7 to 9 in which a pseudo-variation is performed once is determined, there is a 60% probability that a conversation preview will be performed, and of these, there will be a 20% probability that each will include an explanation of the game, a story, etc. , and ``Chance!'' is determined. If a pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 in which the pseudo-variation is performed twice is determined, there is a 60% probability that a conversation preview will be performed, and of these, there will be a 20% probability for each to explain the game nature and the story. , and ``Chance!'' is determined.

Here, each of the fluctuation patterns of previous fluctuation numbers 4 to 12 is selected with the same probability in the case of a loss and the case of a hit. As shown in FIG. 20(d), the probability that the loss and conversation preview performance will be executed is 60%, while the probability that the win and conversation preview performance will be executed is 60%. If the preview performance is executed, the probability of hitting the jackpot (reliability, expectation) is approximately 50%. In this manner, the conversation preview performance is a performance in which the degree of expectation that the changing symbol will become a jackpot symbol (that is, the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur) is lower than that of the group preview performance and the SP title preview performance. Furthermore, regarding the degree of expectation that the fluctuating symbol will become a jackpot symbol (that is, the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur), even if the degree of expectation in the conversation preview performance is lower than that in the group preview performance or the SP title preview performance. For example, any calculation method may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined by the conversation preview execution lottery that the conversation preview effect will be executed, the conversation preview character color lottery determines which of the previous variation patterns from previous variation numbers 4 to 12. The font color in the conversation preview is determined accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 20(e), when the previous variation pattern with previous variation numbers 4 to 6 without pseudo variation is determined, there is a 20% probability that the font color is determined to be green, and a 30% probability that the font color is determined to be green. is determined to be yellow, and the font color is determined to be blue with a 50% probability. When the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation numbers 7 to 9 in which pseudo-variation is performed once is determined, the font color is determined to be green with a 25% probability, the font color is determined to be yellow with a 35% probability, and the font color is determined to be yellow with a 35% probability. % probability that the text color will be set to blue. When a pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 in which pseudo-variation is performed twice is determined, the font color is determined to be red with a 20% probability, the font color is determined to be green with a 25% probability, and the font color is determined to be green with a 25% probability. % probability that the font color will be determined to be yellow, and 30% probability that the font color will be determined to be blue.

In this way, only when the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 in which pseudo-variation is performed twice is determined, the font color in the conversation preview becomes red. As a result, when the conversation preview effect is executed with red text color, it is confirmed that the pseudo fluctuation will be performed twice, so the probability of developing into the late SP reach or the final reach is highest, giving the player a jackpot. It can make you look forward to it.

In addition, even if the previous fluctuation pattern with previous fluctuation numbers 4 to 6 without pseudo fluctuation is determined, or the previous fluctuation pattern with previous fluctuation numbers 7 to 9 in which pseudo fluctuation is performed once, the font color will change. The color may be determined to be red. In this case, if the previous fluctuation pattern with previous fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 is determined, the previous fluctuation pattern with previous fluctuation numbers 4 to 6 is determined, or the previous fluctuation pattern with previous fluctuation numbers 7 to 9 is determined. If we increase the probability that the font color is set to red than in the case of You can expect to hit the jackpot.

In this way, the execution or non-execution of the group preview performance and its type are determined by a lottery using the post-variation numbers related to the post-variation, so that normal reach, SP first half reach, SP second half reach, final reach, and their respective The expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot in the group preview performance can be set in detail according to the situation, such as whether or not there is a jackpot in the group preview performance. On the other hand, the execution or non-execution of the conversation preview performance, its type and font color are determined by lottery using the previous variation number related to the previous variation, without using the subsequent variation number, regardless of the type of reach. The amount of data used for lottery can be reduced. Therefore, by selecting a suitable lottery method depending on the type of performance, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the mode of the pseudo-association is determined by the pseudo-association mode lottery, depending on which previous variation pattern among the previous variation patterns of the previous variation numbers 4 to 12 that develops into a reach is determined. It is determined. The pseudo-connection mode includes a mode in which characters such as "NEXT3", "NEXT!", and "NEXT?" are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 20(f), when the previous variation patterns of previous variation numbers 4 to 6 without pseudo variation are determined, "NEXT?" is determined with a 100% probability. In this case, even if the characters "NEXT?" are displayed, the pseudo fluctuation is not performed because it is a so-called fake effect. When a pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 7 to 9 in which pseudo-variation is performed once is determined, "NEXT!" is determined with a 50% probability, and "NEXT?" is determined with a 50% probability. As a result, when "NEXT!" or "NEXT?" is displayed, it is possible to make the player expect that the pseudo fluctuation will be performed once. If a pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 in which pseudo-variation is performed twice is determined, there is a 40% probability that "NEXT3" will be determined, a 30% probability that "NEXT!" will be determined, and a 30% ``NEXT?'' is determined with a probability of . As a result, when "NEXT3", "NEXT!", or "NEXT?" is displayed, it is possible to make the player expect that the pseudo fluctuation will be performed twice. Furthermore, if "NEXT3" is displayed, it is confirmed that the pseudo fluctuation will be performed twice, so the probability that it will develop into the late SP reach or the final reach is highest, making the player expect a jackpot. .

In this way, the mode of pseudo-association is determined by a lottery using the previous variation number without using the subsequent variation number, regardless of the type of reach, which reduces the amount of data used for the lottery. be able to. Therefore, by selecting a suitable lottery method depending on the type of performance, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. Note that in this embodiment, information on whether or not to perform a pseudo fluctuation is already included as information on the previous fluctuation pattern, but information on whether or not to perform a pseudo fluctuation is not included as information on the previous fluctuation pattern. Whether or not to perform a pseudo fluctuation may also be determined by a lottery using the previous fluctuation number regarding the previous fluctuation.

The presence or absence of a group preview performance and its type, the execution status and type of a conversation preview performance, its type and font color, and the mode of pseudo-association are based on a set of pre-variation numbers and post-variation numbers, as shown in Figures 18 and 19. Since the decision is not made by a lottery using variation numbers that correspond to all the variation patterns that have become, it is possible to avoid an increase in the amount of data used for the lottery and an increase in the work load during design related to the lottery. be able to.

In addition, whether or not to execute the group preview performance and its type are determined by a lottery using variation numbers that correspond to all variation patterns in which the previous variation number and the subsequent variation number are set, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19. may be done. In this way, it is possible to set the expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot in the group preview presentation in more detail according to the situation.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the recovery process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 through the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then executes the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, the firing of the game ball by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and losing symbols etc. are stopped and displayed, and a game stopping state different from the losing symbol is displayed. The display may be controlled so that a display corresponding to the display is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 diagnoses the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, Data such as information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The game is executed by driving the standard pattern display section 26, and the number of pending standard patterns is displayed by causing the standard pattern storage display section 25 to emit light.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The production control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 22 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing to make settings for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stopping process involves stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "lose", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to a predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 or step S56, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects a random number 1 for jackpot determination and a random number 1 for jackpot determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section (not shown). Numerical data indicating random number random 2 and random number random 3 and 4 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in the first special figure holding storage section (not shown), while when the starting opening buffer value is "2" At some point, numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage section (not shown).

The numerical data indicating random number random 1 for jackpot determination and random number random 2 for jackpot type determination determines whether or not the fluctuating display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is considered a "jackpot". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step S59, transmission settings for a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the effect control board 12 Settings are made to send the first start prize designation command to. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, 2. Configure settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 22 after the special symbol process process is completed. Ru.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage (step S61). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the starting opening buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the starting winning determination process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first pending storage buffer (a storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the first special symbol) or the second pending storage buffer (the storage buffer for storing the pending storage information of the second special symbol). It is determined whether there is any pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information (step S1001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Through the control in steps S1004 to S1006, if even one piece of data in the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data in the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The order of the second pending storage number) is 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step S1009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10) and a random number for jackpot determination, and determining that it is a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a variable-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot judgment values are set in advance (the table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 11(a) are set), and a table in which the number of jackpot judgment values is A normal jackpot judgment table (table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 11(a) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 11(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times), and the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the earlier of the following conditions is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step S1011), the process advances to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any jackpot determination value in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 11(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 11(c) are tables used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and stores them in the pending storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 26, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-fluctuation pattern based on random numbers 3 and 4, depending on the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the after fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the after fluctuation pattern based on the selected after fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on Random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and subsequent variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol fluctuation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1201), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special symbol stopping process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 22. Control is performed to derive and display (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process moves to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the ROМ101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the time between rounds for the normal big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, opening modes for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 3R are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening a normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening a V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in a RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the regular big prize opening in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. . Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process moves to step S1316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process moves to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step S1313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), and proceeds to step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process moves to step S1315 without performing the process in step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a big winning hole opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step S1404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). A corresponding grand prize opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 30, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process moves to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step S1503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step S1503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning prize counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), a probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process moves to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 82, or controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. One of the controls for closing is performed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 31, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the release number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), and a jackpot end time (indication that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, set a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5 (step S1603), update the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), Finish the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a specified command after opening the big winning opening is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V big prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying that the big prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process. As shown in FIG. 32, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process moves to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is present is set (step S1707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), a probability variation determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step S1711). Then, the process moves to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect is set (step S1705), and a time saving number counter is set to 100. (step S1706), and the process moves to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained.

(Main processing for production control)
When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. The production control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 33. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 34, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , by driving the movable body 32, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED driver. Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. When receiving a production control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special game is a "lose", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 35, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a loss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a loss, the production control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern has been received as a variation pattern command (step S7103).

When determining that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of a loss that does not become a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol using the data table for determining a loss symbol (step S7105), the process advances to step S7106.

If it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbols of the production symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols are determined (step S7104), and in step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, if it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (if it is determined to be a jackpot), the performance control CPU 101 configures a combination of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot. A stop symbol of the production symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process advances to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, a group preview setting process), the process advances to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, symbol fluctuation control is performed according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command and various performance control (performance movement) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is used to control the variation display of production symbols, such as production control process timer setting values, production control process timer judgment values, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and end codes. It includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the data, and the content of various performance controls, switching timing of performance control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process in step S7109, the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and Control of the speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is started (step S7110). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is outputted to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a production pattern) according to the variation pattern. Further, in order to control light emission/extinguishing of light emitting bodies such as various LEDs, a control signal (luminance data) is output to the LED driver. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice setting processing. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 36, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing a group preview has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sends a variation pattern command including the after variation patterns of after variation numbers 6 to 8 when a loss occurs, and a variation pattern including after variation patterns of after variation numbers 10 to 12 when a win occurs. Determine whether a command has been received. In addition, the fluctuation patterns including the after fluctuation patterns of after fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 8 to 15, and the fluctuation patterns including the after fluctuation patterns of after fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 18 to 12. ~26 fluctuation patterns.

If the effect control CPU 120 has not received a variation pattern command that can execute a group preview (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the production control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command that can execute a group notice (Y in step S7061), it converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22, the previous variation time is 41,500 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 1,246, and the subsequent variation time is 91,900 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 3,000. For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26, the previous variation time is 62000 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 1861, and the subsequent variation time is 142800 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 4288. .

The performance control CPU 120 executes a group preview lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses the group preview lottery table shown in FIGS. Determine the type of.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the group preview lottery. If the performance control CPU 120 does not win in the group preview lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 wins the group preview lottery (Y in step S7064), it extracts a performance control pattern for executing the group preview according to the stage (step S7065), and ends the process.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22 and in the case of stage A, production control is performed so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame of the 1246 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Further, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1385th frame of the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of a variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in stage A, production control is performed to execute a group preview from the 1600th frame out of 1861 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Further, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 2000th frame out of 4288 frames in the post-variation.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice execution processing. The group preview execution process is included in the variable display performance process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 37, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the performance control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is set, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

If the performance control pattern for executing the group preview has not been set (N in step S7202), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the performance control pattern for executing a group preview is set (Y in step S7202), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the frame of the execution timing of the group preview has been reached (S7203). For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached.

If the execution timing frame of the group preview has not been reached (N in step S7203), the production control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the execution timing frame of the group preview has been reached (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group preview (step S7204). For example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to emit, blink, or turn off based on the group preview brightness data table shown in FIGS. control to output sound. After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability-variable jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying the image, right-handed hitting display section 30 of special pattern LED board 20 and right-handed hitting display section 55 of fourth symbol unit 50 also encourage right-handed hitting by emitting light from light emitting means such as LEDs. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, 10 times in the case of a 10R variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 30, and the right-hand game display section 55 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 22 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 30, and right-handed hitting display section 55 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 30, and the right-handed hitting display section 55 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 30, and right-handed hitting display section 55 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Design of group preview performance]
Next, the design of the group preview effect at the development stage of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice work process. As shown in FIG. 38, the work processes for group previews include, in order of work, a summary creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), a main video production process (step S903), and an authoring process. (Step S904), sound creation process (Step S905), lottery integration process (Step S906), video integration process (Step S907), sound integration process (Step S908), lamp data The process includes a creation process (step S909) and a lamp assembly process (step S910).

In the outline creation step of step S901, an outline for newly designing a group preview in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created.

In the animation production process of step S902, the animation storyboard used in the group preview is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-board is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. production, and the actual production of animation.

In the main video production process of step S903, video data used in the group preview is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group preview is created in this video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group preview actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created for a long time. As a result, even if the execution time of the group preview becomes longer due to a design change, the video data created in the video production process can be used as is without being changed. In addition, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each performance. For example, in the variation pattern with main variation number 22, the group preview animation for stage A is included in the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame, and the group preview for stage B is executed from the 1385th frame. An animation of the group preview is included in this video so that the group preview is executed from the beginning. In addition, in the variation pattern with main variation number 26, the group preview animation for stage A is included in the video so that the group preview is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group preview for stage B is executed from the 2000th frame. An animation of the group preview is included in this video so that the group preview is executed from the beginning.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video playback to be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation process of step S905, data for various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group preview are created in accordance with the group preview video.

In the lottery incorporating step of step S906, data regarding various lotteries related to the group preview lottery, such as the group preview lottery, is created. In addition, in the process of incorporating this lottery, the expectation level (reliability) of the group notice etc. is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as lottery software to be executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is installed into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software that is executed at the group notice.

In the sound incorporation step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creation step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed at the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, various brightness data such as light emission, blinking, and extinguishing of lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in group notices are created.

In the lamp installation step of step S910, the brightness data of various types of light emission, blinking, turning off, etc. of lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation step is used as software for lamp reproduction executed in Pachinko game 1. It is incorporated into a pachinko game machine 1.

Through the work in each of these steps, lottery data, video, and sound data related to the group preview performance are created and incorporated as software to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Production of this video)
The main video production process for group previews will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43. 39 to 43 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 39, first, in STEP 1, character images to be used in the group preview are prepared. For example, in the group preview, the main character Yumu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to represent Yumu-chan running. Note that such character images are created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP 2, a video in which the character steps is created using the four character images g1 to g4 using a video creation tool. For example, when a video creation tool is started, a timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or more layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. The layers are arranged in numerical order from the top, such as layer 1, 2, 3, etc., and the higher the layer is arranged (in other words, the lower the number), the closer the image is to the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is supposed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to values desired by the user.

In STEP 2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a column of a predetermined layer. For example, in the example shown in (a), character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to layer 1, and constitute video data A1 to A4. According to the video data A1 to A4, the stepping video has a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

If the set of video data A1 to A4 of stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the video of the character stepping will be repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, stepping videos of other characters are created in the same way.

As shown in FIG. 40, in STEP 3, a moving image in which the character advances is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. Note that the value corresponding to the center position on both the X-axis and the Y-axis is 0. Therefore, the screen size is -400≦X≦400 and -320≦Y≦320.

By using the settings screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width by which the video data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), a setting screen 730 dedicated to character A (Yumemu-chan) is shown, and on the setting screen 730, stepping video data A1 of a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is displayed. One period of ~A4 is set to 500, and it is set to move linearly on the X axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500.

As shown in FIG. 41, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters advance is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), video data in which a character named Jam-chan used in the group preview moves linearly on the X-axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500 is created using the same creation procedure.

As mentioned above, when creating video data for multiple characters that move linearly on the X axis in the range -1000≦X≦500, the video data for each character is placed in different layers as shown in (b). Deploy.

By using the setting screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set not only the width on the X axis along which the video data moves, but also the position on the Y axis and the position on the Z axis of the character. For example, in the example shown in (b), a setting screen 730 dedicated to character B (Jam-chan) is shown. The character is set to be fixed at the -100 position above. In this way, by shifting the Y-axis positions between the characters, it is possible to shift the positions on the Y-axis where the characters appear. Note that the Z-axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the Z axis is the axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen. The performance of the group preview (the Boingo group preview in this embodiment) can be designed so that the characters move between the two sides.

As shown in FIG. 42, in STEP 5, the speed (display time) of the character can be adjusted. For example, as in the case of character A, if the width of the object in the video data is increased, the character becomes slower. That is, the longer the video data is, the slower the character moves from one side of the screen to the other, and the longer the character is displayed on the screen. Furthermore, as in the example of character B, if the width of the object in the video data is reduced, the character becomes faster. That is, the shorter the video data is, the faster the character moves from one side of the screen to the other, and the shorter the time the character is displayed on the screen.

Note that even if the moving speed of the character is changed by expanding or contracting the width of the object in the video data, the content of the video data does not change. For example, as shown in FIG. 39(b), for character A, video data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles is used, but even if the video data is expanded or contracted, the video data is A1 This data is composed of data in which A4 to A4 are repeated for 3 cycles. Specifically, when moving image data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles is expanded, each data in A1 to A4 that is repeated for three cycles is equally expanded. Furthermore, when moving image data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles is shrunk, each data in A1 to A4 that is repeated for three cycles is equally shrunk.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the example described above, and when the moving speed of the character is changed by expanding or contracting the width of the object in the video data, the content of the video data may change in accordance with the expansion or contraction. Specifically, when video data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for 3 cycles is expanded, new data from A1 to A4 is added in addition to the data from A1 to A4 that is repeated for 3 cycles, and for example, A1 to A4 is ~ A4 may be video data that is repeated for four cycles. Also, when video data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for 3 cycles is compressed, some data is deleted from each data of A1 to A4 that is repeated for 3 cycles, and for example, A1 to A4 is repeated for 2 cycles. It may be repeated video data.

As explained in STEP 4 and STEP 5 above, video data for a group preview presentation can be created by changing the position of the object in the video data of each character and changing the width of the object in the video data. Can be done. For example, in STEP 6, the video data is arranged so that character A appears before character B and the display time of character A is longer than the display time of character B.

As shown in FIG. 43, in STEP 7, a group preview moving image is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), the video of the group preview is completed by arranging the video data of six types of characters, characters A to F, on the timeline of the layer.

Also, by changing the length of the video data on the timeline, the animation itself can change the speed at which the character moves while maintaining a video in which a pattern of character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three periods. Can be done. For example, like the video data of character C placed on layer 9, the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is video data in which a pattern of video images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. , the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed on layer 9. As a result, character C placed on layer 10 will advance on the screen at a faster speed than character C placed on layer 9, while maintaining the same animation as character C placed on layer 9. .

Note that in the six-person group preview, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at the coordinates placed on the screen. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 43(a) as well, video data of a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same length on the timeline.

Furthermore, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of the sand smoke is placed in layer 1 located on the rearmost side, the moving image of the sand smoke can be combined with the moving image of a plurality of characters.

In the manner described above, it is possible to create video data of a group preview in which a plurality of characters advance. In addition, in the actual creation of the group preview video data, it is assumed that the game board 2 will cover the edge of a screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 will cover the screen. Group preview video data is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position. Furthermore, so that it can be applied to a screen of a larger size (eg, 20 inches) than a predetermined screen size (eg, 19 inches), group preview video data is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the overall image of the six-person group preview. As shown in FIG. 44, in the six-person group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of six characters, Maid A to Maid F, advancing as a group is displayed. The group preview performance is not limited to six characters, but a plurality of each character appears, so that among the performances that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1, the group preview performance has the largest number of characters displayed. Maid A to Maid F are all wearing the same or nearly the same maid outfits, making it difficult to tell the type of character apart from recognizing them by their faces. In this embodiment, the designs of the aprons worn by each character are different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the differences at first glance. Note that maid A is Yumu-chan, who is the main character, and maid B is Jam-chan, who is the character with the next highest priority after Yumu-chan, who is the protagonist.

In the six-person group preview, sometimes the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and sometimes a part of the character image (for example, the face or legs) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, six maid A (Mume-chan) appear, but only five of them have faces visible. That is, among the six maids who appear, one of the maids A's face does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid B (Jam-chan) appear, but only four of them have faces visible. That is, among the five maids B who appear, one face does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five Maid C's appear, but only three of them have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids C who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid Ds appear, of which only three Maid D's faces can be seen. That is, the faces of two of the five maids D who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid E's appear, but only three of them have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids E who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid Fs appear, of which only three Maid F's faces can be seen. That is, the faces of two of the five maids F who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, there are two types of characters displayed in a group preview performance: characters whose whole bodies fit within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies (for example, faces) do not fit within the display area of the screen. This includes a character whose other parts of the whole body (for example, parts other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the multiple characters displayed in the group preview are characters with low importance in the content of the pachinko machine 1, such as maids C to F, and maids A (Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan). In the content of pachinko machine 1, maids C to F are more important characters than maids C to F, and maids A and B are more important than maids C to F because their faces do not fit within the display area of the screen. The proportion of parts other than the face that are displayed within the display area of the screen is low. In other words, the six-person group preview is designed so that Maid A and Maid B appear more often while showing their faces than Maid C to F.

(Display priority)
FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the display priority in the group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 45, in the group preview performance, an auxiliary display (effect display) is performed to emphasize that the characters are progressing. In this embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as the auxiliary display. By displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, or more effectively, following the advancing character, it is possible to make the player think that the sand smoke is being generated by the progress of the character. This allows you to emphasize the way the character runs through the scene. As shown in FIG. 43(b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is the auxiliary display, is arranged on layer 1 located on the rearmost side. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 45, the image of the sand cloud is positioned further back than any of the appearing characters.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the layer on which Maid E's image is placed is on the front side of the layer on which Maid C's image is placed, so Maid E's image is lower than Maid C's image. is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the auxiliary display image corresponding to Maid E is located on the back side of both Maid E's image and Maid C's image.

In this way, when the display of maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of the maid E is given priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is When the display of Maid C overlaps, the display of Maid C is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to Maid E.

In addition, the display layer of the characters (maids A to F) in the group preview presentation has a higher priority than the display layer of the reduced decorative pattern. Therefore, the image of the character in the group preview presentation is displayed in front of the image of the reduced decorative pattern. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the characters in the group preview presentation are displayed so as to pass in front of the reduced-display decorative pattern.

On the other hand, the character display layer in the group preview presentation has a lower priority than the small symbol display layer. Therefore, the image of the character in the group preview presentation is displayed on the back side of the image of the small pattern. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the characters in the group preview presentation are displayed so as to pass behind the small pattern.

In this way, since the characters in the group preview performance are displayed as images passing in front of the reduced display decorative symbols, it is possible to make the group preview performance more dynamic. On the other hand, since the character in the group preview effect displays an image passing through the back side of the small symbol, visibility of symbol fluctuations in the reach effect can be ensured, and as a result, the group preview effect can be suitably displayed. can be provided.

In addition, during the image display period in the group preview performance, the period in which the decorative pattern reduced and displayed by the display of the characters in the group preview performance is hidden is longer than the period in which the decorative pattern reduced and displayed by the display of the character in the group preview performance is hidden. It is longer than the period without. As a result, the time during which the screen including the decorative pattern images is filled with characters in the group preview performance becomes longer, and the group preview performance can be made more dynamic.

Furthermore, the display layer of sand smoke, which is an effect applied to the characters in the group preview performance, has a higher priority than the display layer of the reduced decorative pattern. Therefore, the effect image of sand smoke in the group preview presentation is displayed in front of the image of the reduced decorative pattern. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the effect image of sand smoke in the group preview presentation is displayed so as to pass in front of the reduced-displayed decorative pattern.

In this way, the effect image of the sand smoke in the group preview performance is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the reduced display decorative pattern, so that the group preview performance can be made more dynamic.

Note that the cut-in display may be performed while the symbols are changing, such as during reach. The cut-in display is a display that indicates whether or not the changing symbol will become a jackpot symbol. When a cut-in display is performed, another image is displayed in between the currently displayed image. It is also possible to indicate the expectation level of a jackpot by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the jackpot expectation level may be higher than when the cut-in display is green. Furthermore, the display layer of the group preview effect may be the same as the display layer of the cut-in effect that occurs during execution of the ready-to-reach effect.

In this way, by providing an image for the cut-in display that is displayed on the same layer as the image for the group preview performance, separate from the display layer of the image for the group preview performance, any problems ( For example, even if a display problem occurs (such as an image in a group preview effect being displayed in front of the fourth symbol), the image in the group preview effect with the problem can be replaced with an image in the cut-in display. This allows you to eliminate problems with screen display.

(motion blur processing)
FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in group preview presentation. As shown in FIG. 46, in the group preview presentation, motion blur processing is applied to the advancing characters. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character). By applying motion blur processing to the display of a progressing character, the afterimage of the character is displayed after the progressing character. It will be displayed. This makes it possible to create a lively group preview effect. In addition, when an image obtained by motion blur processing for one character overlaps an image obtained by motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for that one character is applied so as not to obstruct the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspects of outline when characters overlap)
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the form of outlines when characters overlap in a group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 47, in the group preview presentation, one character may overtake the other characters. At this time, when the display of the overtaking character and the display of another character overlap, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), maid B, who is located in front of maid A, is shown passing maid A. In this case, the outline of maid B is larger than that of maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Also, it is shown that Maid A, who is located in front of Maid F, overtakes Maid F, but in this case, the outline of Maid A is thicker than the outline of Maid F, and Maid A is It is displayed more emphatically than Maid F.

Furthermore, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that maid B, who is located in front of maid A, overtakes maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is smaller than the outline of maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Also, it is shown that Maid A, who is located in front of Maid D, overtakes Maid D, but in this case, the outline of Maid A is thicker than that of Maid D, and Maid A is It is displayed more emphatically than Maid D.

In addition, when one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to making the outline of the first character thicker, but also making the size of the first character larger or making the brightness of the first character higher than the brightness of the other character. One character may be displayed more emphatically than the other characters by making the contrast of one character higher or by making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of other characters.

(Display on screen of image display device)
FIG. 48 is a diagram looking into the space between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during execution of the group preview performance. As shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 described above, since the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is no longer visible. However, as shown in FIG. 48, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 is visible.

Here, in FIG. 48, in the six-person group preview, as shown in (a), while the entirety of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is not yet displayed, a part of the maid A (in this example From the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), while the whole of Maid A that was initially displayed is not yet displayed, a part of Maid A is displayed in the first situation. The second maid B (Jam-chan) is displayed more than the situation, and while the entirety of the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of her face in this example) is displayed. It has been shown that the situation will occur. Furthermore, the character displayed first (maid A) and the character displayed second (maid B) have different positional coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is viewed while looking into the space between the image display device 5 and the device 5. In other words, FIG. 48 shows a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 7(b), the game board 2 is the image display device Even if the edge of the screen in 5 is covered, in the 6-person group preview, the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is still not shown in its entirety, but a part of the maid A (in this example) From the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, the whole of the maid A that was initially displayed is not yet displayed, but a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 A second situation occurs in which the entirety of the maid B (Jam-chan) who was displayed is not displayed yet, but a part of the maid B (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed.

(Example of failure in this video production process)
As shown in FIG. 43(b) and FIG. 48, in this video production process, the second character B appears shortly after character A appears so that the first character A, who runs at the top, is not isolated. The video data of each character is arranged like this. Here, an example will be given of how the screen will look if placement of video data fails in this video production process.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining an example of failure in the video production process. For example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), if the video data of the second character B is placed apart from the video data of the first character A, as shown in FIGS. 49(b) to (d) After character A appears and the body of character A is completely visible, character B finally appears after a while, as shown in FIG. 49(e). In such a case, it appears as if only one character A appeared alone, and does not appear to be a group preview effect.

In this embodiment, in the video production process, the video data is arranged so that the first character A running at the top is not isolated, as shown in FIG. 43(b). An animation in which the characters appear one after another and run through the scene is now displayed, and by having multiple characters advance as a group, the group preview performance can be made into a powerful performance.

(Overall picture of Bakuchu group preview)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the overall picture of the Bakuchu group preview. As shown in FIG. 50, in the Bakuchu group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of characters such as Bakuchu advancing in a group is displayed.

In the Bakuchu group preview, sometimes the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and sometimes a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. Sometimes there are.

In this way, in the Bakuchu group preview, the moving image data of the Bakuchu group preview is created by arranging on the screen an image of an animation in which one type of character moves as if it were moving. The video data for the Bakuchu group preview is also created in the same manner as the video data for the 6-person group preview, based on the work steps shown in FIGS. 38 to 43.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group preview performance)
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in a group preview performance. As shown in Figure 51, the group preview effects (6-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo group preview) are divided into a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec). It is divided into

The first display period is a period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends for the first time in the group preview performance. More specifically, the first display period is a period from when any character first appears in the group preview presentation until when any character first disappears. For example, if one character appears first in a group preview presentation and the one character continues to advance at the top, the period until the one character disappears becomes the first display period. Alternatively, if one character appears first in a group preview presentation and is overtaken by another character, the first display period is the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen. . In this embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, is overtaken by the second character that appears, and then the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which the display of a new character continues to start and end. More specifically, during the second display period, after one of the characters first disappears in the group preview performance, new characters continue to appear one after another, and the last character disappears. This is the period until it appears. Note that the second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Furthermore, the number of characters appearing in the second display period is greater than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of a character continues to end without the display of a new character starting. More specifically, the third display period is a period from when the last character appears in the group preview presentation until all the characters disappear. Note that the character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, but may be a character that is removed by the character that appears last. Note that the third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group preview performance, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and change the volume of the performance sound in the first display period. The volume is increased to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50, the sound volume corresponding to the group preview performance is at the minimum level (for example, muted or lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases in volume. Once the specified value is reached, the specified value (for example, the set volume or maximum volume) is maintained thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. Thereafter, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at the specified value, and then gradually decreases step by step until it reaches the minimum.

Note that the gradual increase in the volume in stages from the minimum to the specified value during the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, the gradual decrease in the volume from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as a volume fade-out. In this embodiment, the fade-in time from when the production sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the production sound increases from the minimum to the specified value is such that the volume of the production sound decreases during the third display period. This is shorter than the fade-out time from the start until the volume of the performance sound reaches its minimum.

The brightness data table includes a plurality of brightness data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light. The plurality of light emitting means include a frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, and electric lamp. Includes game effect lamps such as a chew lamp 9H, a stick controller lamp 9J, and a trigger button lamp 9K. The brightness data table includes a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period, a second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third brightness data table corresponding to the third display period. . That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 emits, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and in the second display period, In the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 emits light, blinks, or turns off based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of occurrence of 6-person group notice in Stage A)
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a six-person group notice in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the six-person group preview is executed from the 1600th frame during the pre-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 9 that loses in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). Therefore, the six-person group preview starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 in which SP reach is lost in the first half, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the second half of the total variation time (2984 frames). In other words, if you lose in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result ( 2984 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the second half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that wins in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the 6-person group preview is as follows. It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4662 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group notice is executed is the timing (2331st frame) close to half of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 23 that hits in the second half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the 6-person group preview is as follows. It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23 that is a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the latter half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4861 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is a timing close to half (approximately 2430th frame) of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that will win at the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the 6-person group notice is It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26 that results in a win in the final reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, if the final reach is a win, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is a timing close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). (second half).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the after fluctuation time is set to be long, so the relevant change is made after the variable display starts. In the predetermined period until the variable display suggests that the display result is a loss, the first display period of the six-person group preview is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. . However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result is In the predetermined period, the first display period of the six-person group preview may be configured to start in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the Bakuchu group notice in Stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Bakuchu group preview is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-fluctuation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 9 that loses in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). Therefore, the Bakuchu group preview starts from the 66,600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 that results in a loss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). In other words, if you lose in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result ( 2984 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the second half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that wins in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that is a hit in the first half of SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4662 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group preview is executed (2000th frame) is a timing close to half (2331st frame) of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 23 that hits in the second half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23 that is a hit in the latter half of SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the latter half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4861 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (approximately 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). It's the timing (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that hits in the second half of the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that results in a win in the final reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, if the final reach is a win, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). It's the timing (second half).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the after fluctuation time is set to be long, so the relevant change is made after the variable display starts. In the predetermined period until the variable display indicates that the display result is a loss, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice is not configured to start in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. do not have. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result is In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview of the predetermined period may be configured to start.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 causes one or more lamps (LEDs) of the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9 to emit/flash/turn off. The luminance data for the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of light emission/blinking/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled by the lamp in order to cause the lamp to emit/blink/extinguish. Each game effect lamp 9 emits light/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, a SP reach brightness data table used during SP reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. A brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, a brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending performance to notify the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the jackpot game state, This includes a variable background brightness data table used in the following conditions.

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot gaming state, an ending state, and a variable probability state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the priority when used is increased in the order of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table.

For example, when outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state and the SP reach develops, the production control CPU 120 outputs the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach as the normal background. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background and it develops into SP reach, the mode corresponding to SP reach is based on the brightness data table for SP reach. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for background is not normally output to the LED driver, but after SP reach ends, the brightness data is normally output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. Output.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when it develops into SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach during SP reach, the production control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to SP reach. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table using priority over the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game effect is controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for error is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is cleared and SP reach is in progress again. When returning to the gaming state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach that is being controlled, and uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach to control the brightness of the LED driver. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP ready-to-reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 55 to 81, the brightness data referred to by the performance control CPU 120 when controlling various light emitting means in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. These brightness data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the light emitting location of the game effect lamp in accordance with the display in the group preview based on the brightness data stored in the brightness data table. In this embodiment, a light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a light-emitting lamp is located is called a light-emitting location; A location where a lamp that is not emitting light (that is, a lamp that is turned off) is located is not called a light emitting location. In other examples, a light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness, for example, a location where a lamp that emits light with high brightness among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp is located. A location where a lamp emitting light with a lower luminance than the luminance of a lamp located at the light emitting location is located may not be referred to as a light emitting location.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as elements) for turning on or off a lamp is defined by a brightness data table, and in such a brightness data table, the data storage area referenced by a particular lamp is If data of 0 (for example, data of "000" corresponding to RGB) is stored, the particular lamp is turned off. Further, if there is no storage area for data referenced by a specific lamp in the brightness data table, or if the brightness data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a brightness data table that a specific lamp refers to, and the data storage area that the specific lamp refers to contains one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB). is stored, the specific lamp will emit light.For example, when a specific performance such as a jackpot preview performance is executed during a performance corresponding to a normal background, the lamp will be referenced in the specific performance. Even if data for a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if data for a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table that is referenced in the production corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp will emit light. I will do it.

(Parent table in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 55, the parent table in the group preview brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the performance time of each group preview performance is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled for 3140 msec to match the group preview performance.

Further, the parent table in the group preview brightness data table stores information specifying child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, UD1, AD1) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

(Child table in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 56, in the child table of the group preview brightness data table, the time of the group preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 90 to 91 and 146 to 148, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W1, and the accessory lamp 9A is Grandchild tables Y1, L1 for the board left lamp 9B, U1 for the top lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E are provided, respectively. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 51.

In the second display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later), of the period in which the group preview effect is executed, W2 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y2 is displayed for the accessory lamp 9A, A grandchild table of L2 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U2 is provided for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG. 51.

In the third display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 94, 95, 151, and 152, which will be described later) among the periods in which the group preview effect is executed, the frame lamp is W3, the accessory lamp 9A is Y3, A grandchild table of L3 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U3 is provided for the on board lamp 9C, and A3 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG. 51.

As shown in FIG. 56, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the group preview effect, in any of the first display period, second display period, and third display period, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, Six types of brightness data tables are provided: object lamp 9A, panel left lamp 9B, panel top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

Note that the V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance (for example, near where the characters appear in the group preview performance), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table Also not available. The V lamp 9G is a lamp that informs that the round is in a jackpot game state where a V winning can occur, that a V winning has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, so it is used in the group preview performance. This is because if the light is emitted, the player may think that they have won a V prize or hit the jackpot. Not yet. Note that the V lamp 9G may be provided at other positions, such as near the board left lamp 9B, as a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance. It is sufficient that it is not used in .

In addition, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are positioned at positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance (for example, in the group preview performance, the characters advance). (nearly below the table), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table is not prepared either. The stick controller lamp 9J emits light to prompt a pull operation of the stick controller 31A during an operation effect (the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c91) described later), etc., and the trigger button lamp 9K emits light to prompt a pull operation of the stick controller 31A during a PUSH effect (the effect shown in FIG. 88 (described later)). Since the lamp emits light to prompt the user to press the push button 31B in the presentation shown in a19), if the lamp is emitted during the group preview presentation, the player cannot operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the stick controller lamp 9J and trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group preview presentation. Note that the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions, such as near the board left lamp 9B, as positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance; However, it is sufficient that it is not used in group preview performances.

The characteristics of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used as grandchild tables in the group preview presentation are summarized as follows. Specifically, the number of high-intensity light emitting locations is greater in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 performs light emission control at equal intervals of 100 msec, whereas W2 performs light emission control at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and W3 performs light emission control at 10 msec for the frame left lamp 9L. In contrast, the light emission control is performed at short intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the light emission pattern, the brightness data for W1 is stipulated so that light is emitted at high brightness while moving the light emitting point according to the direction of advance of the group notice, whereas for W2, light is emitted at high brightness over multiple points. For W3, the brightness data is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or emitted at low brightness according to the direction of advance of the group notice. There is. Regarding the initial brightness data, W1 is specified so that all lamps are turned off or emitted at low brightness, whereas W2 and W3 are specified so that predetermined light emitting points are emitted at high brightness. Brightness data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the last luminance data, W3 is defined such that all the lamps, both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, are turned off or emitted at low luminance.

Regarding the luminance data loop, W1 and W3 are not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used, whereas W2's luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used. Regarding brightness data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting purposes, W1 and W3 are defined, whereas W2 is not defined.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the group preview luminance data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, Furthermore, at the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting. In addition, in W1, first luminance data is a combination of data for causing each lamp included in the frame lamp to turn off or emit light at low luminance and data for causing each lamp to emit light at high luminance for each time; A combination of data for turning each lamp off or emitting light at low brightness and data for causing each lamp to emit light at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is set as first luminance data, a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data is also defined for other times.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for "R" for all lamps included in the frame lamp, "G" and " “B” is defined as “0” indicating that the light is off. As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (a22) and FIG. 146 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or emit light at low brightness. It becomes like this. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on. In this embodiment, in order to make the effect more effective by emitting mainly red light from each lamp, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R", and "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "G" and "B". For example, if each lamp emits mainly green light, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for "G", and "R" and "B" It is sufficient if “0” indicating off is specified for “B”, and “1” indicating low brightness is specified for “B” if each lamp emits mainly blue light, and “off” is specified for “R” and “G”. ``0'' indicating ``0'' may be specified.

In addition, in W1, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the lamps that emit light at high brightness from near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp are spaced at equal intervals of 100 msec. The brightness data is specified so that it moves by . Here, the areas around the right frame lamps 9R5 to 9R8 correspond to the locations where the characters appear in the group preview, and the brightness data is set so that the locations of the lamps that emit high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the characters advance. stipulated. The lamp on the left side of the frame is initially off or emits light at low brightness, and as the lamp that emits high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character moves, it gradually increases in intensity. Luminance data is specified so that light is emitted at certain luminance levels. On the other hand, the lamps 9R5 to 9R8 on the right side of the frame, which were initially emitting light with high brightness, will turn off or emit light with low brightness as the lamps emitting high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Brightness data is specified in . As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 and FIGS. 146 to 148, which will be described later, the frame lamp also moves from the right side of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the progress of the characters appearing from the right end of the screen in the group preview. The position of the high-intensity light emitted changes towards the left side.

In addition, W1 includes data that causes one frame lamp to emit light at high brightness and turns off other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp, and the brightness is adjusted so that the part of the lamp that emits light is moved in stages. Data is specified. As a result, in W1, the location of the lamp that emits light with high brightness can be moved in accordance with the direction in which the character moves.

Further, in W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely set to high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the frame lamps when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the light will emit light at .

Here, if data for these 10 minutes were not provided, if the light emission control was performed using W1 and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the lamp light emission control would be performed again from T1-1. Even though the characters in the group preview have already appeared and the progress is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the high rise again starts from near the right frame lamps 9R5 to 9R8. The part of the lamp that emits light depending on the brightness moves, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in this embodiment, data for 10 minutes is provided at T1-11, so even if the light emission control is performed using W1 and the transition to W2 is not made due to some abnormality, the data for 10 minutes is Since the frame lamp can be caused to emit light in a light emission mode that matches the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable. If the abnormality is resolved within these 10 minutes, the player can continue playing the game without feeling any discomfort.

In W1, luminance data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so luminescence control is not performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

In addition, the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes specified in W1 is brightness data that causes adjacent frame lamps to emit light in order and in a regular manner so that the light emitting points are shifted from the previous state of T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is displayed for each lamp at irregular intervals from T2-1 to T2-10 at 50 to 80 msec. stipulated. In addition, in W2, first luminance data is a combination of data for causing each lamp included in the frame lamp to turn off or emit light at low luminance and data for causing each lamp to emit light at high luminance for each time; A combination of data for turning each lamp off or emitting light at low brightness and data for causing each lamp to emit light at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is set as first luminance data, a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data is also defined for other times.

In W2, lamps that emit light at high brightness sparsely (randomly) include brightness data that causes one frame lamp to emit light at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to emit light at high brightness. The brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes. For example, in W2, sparse high-brightness data (for example, "A") is defined so that light is emitted at high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, as shown in FIG. 92, FIG. 93, FIG. 149, and FIG. starts to emit light at high brightness sparsely. Furthermore, W2 is designed to cause more frame lamps to emit light with higher brightness than W1.

Note that in W2, unlike W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so the light emission control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the light emission control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality, and the lamp light emission control is performed again from T2-1, the frame lamps will be sparsely high. Since the mode of emitting light with brightness is simply repeated, the player does not feel particularly uncomfortable.

Also, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all the data that is referenced every time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, but the time required to create each data Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which makes it very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of this embodiment, by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10 to perform light emission control, only one set of data that is repeatedly referenced can be created. This can improve time efficiency. The reason why one set of data is repeatedly used to control the light emission in the second display period in the group preview performance is that the second display period in the group preview performance is longer than the first display period or the third display period. In addition, the second display period in the group preview performance is a time period in which the screen is filled with multiple characters and the multiple characters advance as a group, so the light emission corresponding to such a performance is This is also because it is sufficient to repeat the same type of light emission.

As shown in FIG. 57(c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is displayed for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp at short intervals of 10 msec from T3-7 to T3-38, and for the frame right lamp, it is continued from T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec. RGB data is defined.

In addition, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T3-2 to T3-30, the lamps that were emitting high brightness from around the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 gradually turn off or dim. Increase the number of lamps that are turned off or emit light at low brightness so that they emit light at high brightness. Regarding T3-7 to T3-38, brightness data is specified at 80 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview. ~9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or to low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94, 95, 151, and 152, which will be described later, the frame lamp changes from the right side of the pachinko machine 1 to the left side in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview. As the time progresses, the light turns off or the position where the light is emitted at low brightness changes.

Furthermore, in W3, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or emitted at low brightness at the time of transition from T3-30. Furthermore, in W3, similarly to W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp is turned off or emitted at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the frame lamp when moving to the next performance.

In W3, luminance data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for accessory lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining an example of an accessory lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. As mentioned above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. RRRR”. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Note that monochromatic LEDs have fewer light-blocking filters than full-color LEDs, so the light is emitted more intensely. For this reason, monochrome LEDs have smaller luminance data corresponding to high luminance than full-color LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In Y1, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (a22) and FIG. 146 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or at low brightness. It starts to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is set in accordance with the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not feel strange when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that light is sparsely emitted with high brightness.

In Y1, the luminance data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 58(b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A is The brightness data is specified.

Y2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to emit light at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to emit light at high brightness, and the lamps that emit light at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the characters are displayed in groups in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group preview performance. The lamp 9A begins to emit light with high brightness sparsely.

Note that in Y2, unlike in Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so the light emission control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 58(c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in Y3, similarly to Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the accessory lamp 9A emits light at a low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the accessory lamp 9A when moving to the next performance.

In Y3, the luminance data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grandchild table for panel left lamp in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the group preview luminance data table. As mentioned above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. "WWWWW" is displayed. It should be noted that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED was only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the left lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (a22) and FIG. 146 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are turned off or at low brightness. It starts to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Furthermore, in L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the board left lamp 9B is adjusted in accordance with the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the board left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that light is sparsely emitted with high brightness.

In L1, the luminance data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as described above is specified, so the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the panel left lamp 9B is The brightness data is specified.

L2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to emit light at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to emit light at high brightness, and the lamps that emit light at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the left side of the board is The lamp 9B begins to emit light with high brightness sparsely.

Note that in L2, unlike in L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so the light emission control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in L3, similarly to L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the board left lamp 9B emits light at a low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the board left lamp 9B when moving to the next performance.

In L3, the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so the light emission control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for on-board lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. As mentioned above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (red)). The LED has three colors: R), green (G), and blue (B), and the brightness is expressed as hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Thus, the high brightness values used in multi-color LEDs are larger than the high brightness values used in single-color LEDs. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED was only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the lamp on the panel 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (a22) and FIG. 146 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are off or have low brightness. It starts to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is set in accordance with the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that light is sparsely emitted with high brightness.

In U1, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, the light emission control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the on-board lamp 9C is The brightness data is specified.

U2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to emit light at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to emit light at high brightness, and the lamps that emit light at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the board is displayed in accordance with the characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. The lamp 9C begins to emit light with high brightness sparsely.

Note that in U2, unlike U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so the light emission control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 60(c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in U3, similarly to U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or emitted at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next performance.

In U3, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, the light emission control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

Note that in all of U1, U2, and U3, only data "0" is defined for the monochromatic on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8. That is, the lamps 9C6 to 9C8 on the board are not used in the group preview presentation.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to The brightness is expressed as a hexadecimal number "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and its brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Thus, the high brightness values used in multi-color LEDs are greater than the high brightness values used in single-color LEDs. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the V attacker lamp 9F, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (a22) and FIG. 146 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are turned off. Or it will start emitting light at low brightness. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, each lamp is set to have high brightness sparsely in accordance with the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of each lamp when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the light will emit light at

In A1, luminance data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so luminescence control is not performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 61(b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is specified for each lamp at irregular intervals from T2-1 to T2-10 at 50 to 80 msec. has been done.

A2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to emit light at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to emit light at high brightness, and the lamps that emit light at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group preview performance, the attacker lamp is displayed in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F begin to emit light with high brightness sparsely.

Note that in A2, unlike in A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so the light emission control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 61(c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in A3, similarly to A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker The brightness data is defined so that the lamp 9F is turned off or emits light at low brightness.

In A3, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, the light emission control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Parent table in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 62, the parent table in the reach line brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each performance time of the reach line performance is defined.

The reach line performance is different from the group preview performance, and is a performance that foretells that the display result of the variable display using special symbols or decorative symbols will be the display result in which the jackpot symbol stops. It is a performance that suggests (or informs) people. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87 and FIGS. 134 to 137, which will be described later, a flash of light and a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appear from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , the reach line expands inwardly and outwardly (in the left-right direction) to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, shrinks and expands, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table of the reach line brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec to match the reach line performance.

Further, the parent table in the reach line brightness data table stores information specifying child tables (WD11, YD11, LD11, UD11, AD11) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

(child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 63, in the child table of the reach line brightness data table, the time of the reach line performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, during the period in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which a flash occurs (the effect period shown in FIGS. 84 (a8), (a9) and 134 (a8), (a9), which will be described later), the frame Grandchild tables W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the board left lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E are provided.

During the period in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which the reach line occurs (the effect period shown in FIGS. 85 and 135, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the board left lamp. L12 grandchild tables are provided for each node 9B. Note that during the period in which the reach line occurs, the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used, so no grandchild table is prepared.

During the period in which the reach line effect is executed, the reach line extends inward and outward and expands while contracting (as shown in FIGS. 86 (a13) to 87 (b17) and FIGS. 136 (a13) to 137 (b17), which will be described later). During the production period), the following grandchild tables are provided: W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the board left lamp 9B, U13 for the top board lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E.

During the period in which the reach line performance is executed, during the period in which the reach line disappears (the period of the performance shown in FIG. 87 (a18) and FIG. 137 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the board left lamp 9B, U14 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in Figure 63, regarding the brightness data table referenced in the reach line effect, the left side of the frame is Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a top board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the brightness data table referred to during the period in which the reach line occurs, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of brightness data tables are provided.

In this way, in the reach line performance, brightness data tables are provided for the same number of lamps as the group preview performance or fewer lamps than the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line performance is a performance that suggests to the player that the game is now reachable, and is not a performance that arouses the player's expectations by suggesting a jackpot like the group preview performance. For this reason, the reach line performance does not perform elaborate light emission control such as providing different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually, as in the group preview performance. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, so that each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the execution time of the reach line effect is shorter than that of the group preview effect, it is difficult to set up different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually, as in the group preview effect. Rather than performing light emission control based on the above, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 84 (a8) and FIG. 134 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp emit light at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. .

As shown in FIG. 64(b), in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 135, which will be described later, while the reach line occurs, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness. The brightness data is specified so that the light will emit light at .

As shown in FIG. 64(c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, while the reach line occurs, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness. The brightness data is specified so that the light will emit light at .

As shown in FIG. 64(d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), and its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 87 (a18) and FIG. 137 (b18), which will be described later, the frame lamp also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grand table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of an accessory lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the grandchild table Y11, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 84 (a8) and FIG. 134 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A emit light at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), in the grandchild table Y12, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 135, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A emit light at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the grandchild table Y13, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 30 msec from T13-1 to T13-2. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A emit light at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 65(d), in the grandchild table Y14, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 87 (a18) and FIG. 137 (b18), which will be described later, the accessory lamp 9A also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grand table for panel left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the reach line brightness data table. It should be noted that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), in the grandchild table L11, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 84 (a8) and FIG. 134 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B emit light at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), in the grandchild table L12, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 135, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all lamps included in the board left lamp 9B emit light at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the grandchild table L13, luminance data is defined for the left lamp 9B at intervals of 60 msec from T13-1 to T13-4. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B emit light at high brightness while the reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 66(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 87 (a18) and FIG. 137 (b18), which will be described later, the board left lamp 9B also goes out at the same time as the reach line goes out.

(Grand table for on-board lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. Brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Furthermore, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in the grandchild table U11, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 84 (a8) and FIG. 134 (b8), which will be described later, at the timing when a flash occurs, among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are Brightness data is specified so that light is emitted at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), in the grandchild table U13, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, while a reach line occurs, lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C emit light with high brightness. The brightness data is defined as follows.

As shown in FIG. 67(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 87 (a18) and FIG. 137 (b18), which will be described later, the on-board lamp 9C also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the attacker lamp 9E and electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". ” to “F” represent the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 84 (a8) and FIG. 134 (b8), which will be described later, at the timing when a flash occurs, the brightness is set so that the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F emit light at high brightness. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the grandchild table A13, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F emit light at high brightness while the reach line occurs. There is.

As shown in FIG. 68(d), in the grandchild table A14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), and its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 87 (a18) and FIG. 137 (b18), which will be described later, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off in conjunction with the disappearance of the reach line.

(Parent table in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 69, the parent table in the background preview brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the performance time of each background preview performance is defined.

The background preview performance is different from the group preview performance, and is a performance that foretells that the display result of the variable display using special symbols or decorative symbols will be the display result in which the jackpot symbol stops. chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background).

In the parent table of the background preview brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec to match the background preview effect.

Further, the parent table in the background preview brightness data table stores information specifying child tables (WD21, YD21, LD21, UD21, AD21) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

(Child table in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 70, in the child table of the background preview brightness data table, the time of the background preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background preview effect is executed, W21 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y21 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L21 is used for the left lamp 9B, U21 is used for the top lamp 9C, and U21 is used for the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the 100 msec period during which the background preview effect is executed, W22 for the frame lamp, Y22 for the accessory lamp 9A, L22 for the board left lamp 9B, U22 for the top lamp 9C, and A22 for the attacker lamp 9E. There is a table for each grandchild.

During the last 600,000 msec of the period in which the background preview effect is executed, W23 for the frame lamp, Y23 for the accessory lamp 9A, L23 for the board left lamp 9B, U23 for the top lamp 9C, and A23 for the attacker lamp 9E. There is a table for each grandchild.

As shown in FIG. 70, regarding the luminance data table referred to in the background preview effect, in any of the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600,000 msec, the left frame lamp 9L, the right frame lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A Six types of brightness data tables are provided: , panel left lamp 9B, panel top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

In this way, in the background preview performance, brightness data tables are provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 71(b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 71(c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of an accessory lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), in the grandchild table Y21, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 50 msec from T21-1 to T21-4.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), in the grandchild table Y22, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), in the grandchild table Y23, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for panel left lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), in the grandchild table L21, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), in the grandchild table L22, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), in the grandchild table L23, luminance data is defined for the left lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for on-board lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. Brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the grandchild table U21, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the grandchild table U22, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 74(c), in the grandchild table U23, luminance data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the attacker lamp 9E and electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". ” to “F” represent the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness is adjusted for each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F from T21-1 to T21-2 at 50 msec intervals. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness is adjusted for each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), in the grandstand table A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F is activated from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec. Luminance data is defined for .

(Brightness data table when all lights are on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during full light emission. As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to (h), in the brightness data table when all lights are on, the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, High brightness brightness data (in this example, "F" which is the maximum value) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH performance)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during PUSH performance. The PUSH performance is a performance that prompts the user to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 88 (a19), which will be described later.

FIG. 77(a) shows a brightness data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, brightness data is defined for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The light emitted by the stick controller lamp 9J during the PUSH performance is the same color as the frame lamp and the like during the group preview performance (red in this example).

FIG. 77(b) shows a brightness data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. At T41, brightness data is defined for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH performance is the same color as the frame lamp and the like during the group preview performance (red in this example).

(Child table in group preview luminance data table according to modification)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table according to a modification. As shown in FIG. 80, in the child table in the group preview brightness data table according to the modified example, the time of the group preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table that is referred to in each time period. (also referred to as a brightness data table) is specified.

For example, during the period in which the group preview effect is executed, during the period (2000 msec) up to the middle of the first display period, W101 is for the frame lamp, Y101 is for the accessory lamp 9A, L101 is for the left lamp 9B, L101 is the top lamp. Grandchild tables U101 and A101 are provided for the attacker lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

During the period in which the group preview effect is executed, for the remainder of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec), the frame lamp is W102, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y102. , L102 for the board left lamp 9B, U102 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modification.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period during which the group preview effect is executed, W103 for the frame lamp, Y103 for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 for the board left lamp 9B, and U103 for the top lamp 9C. , and the grandchild table of A103 are provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modification.

In this way, in the group preview brightness data table according to the modified example, in the first brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and during the first display period, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts. The control of the game effect lamp 9 is completed in the second brightness data table, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 is continued during the second display period. However, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and in the third brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period.

(Details of lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table)
As described above, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to cause one or more lamps among the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to emit/blink by lamp control. /Turn off the light.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 every frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 changes the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122 when the sub variable time reaches the timing to start display corresponding to each part (for example, reach display, etc.). Based on this, display control of the image display device 5 is performed. The display control unit 124 sets an extended command corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extended command to the effect control CPU 120. do. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 78, the production control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the reach line based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124.

As described above, the parent table contains information specifying which lamps (light emitting locations) are subject to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. and information specifying a child table to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp (child table designation address) are stored. Note that in the parent table, only lamps that are subject to lamp control are specified, and lamps that are not subject to lamp control are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 55 described above, the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E are specified as lamp control targets, and each lamp 3140 msec is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. In the parent table shown in FIG. 55, child table WD1 is specified for the frame lamp, child table YD1 is specified for the accessory lamp 9A, and child table LD1 is specified for the panel left lamp 9B. , child table UD1 is designated for onboard lamp 9C, and child table AD1 is designated for attacker lamp 9E.

To further explain an example, as mentioned above, in the parent table of the reach line brightness data table shown in FIG. decrements the counter by 1 every 10 msec to measure this 1500 msec. That is, the performance control CPU 120 counts 1500 msec by executing the counter subtraction process 150 times. The performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until it measures a maximum of 1500 msec. In the parent table of the reach line brightness data table, WD11 is designated as a child table for frame lamps.

The child table specifies information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table that is referred to at each time when lamp control is performed. information (designated address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, as described above, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 63, grandchild tables (W11, W12, W13, W14) to be referenced for each time are specified.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the child table WD11 of the reach line brightness data table, 330 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp, and the production control CPU 120 increments the counter by 1 every 10 msec. By subtracting, 330 msec is counted, and the lamp control is performed using the grandchild table specified by the child table WD11 until the time reaches 330 msec. In the child table WD11 of the reach line brightness data table, W11 is designated as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data that is used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, as described above, in the grandchild table W11 shown in FIG. 64, luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec is stored.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output for each element. . Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the "A" luminance data flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the grandchild table W11, "58A" and "123" are specified as luminance data (RGB data) at intervals of 30 msec for the frame lamp. The production control CPU 120 measures 330 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and reads the brightness data at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W11 until the time reaches 330 msec. Output to LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can control the frame lamp via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, a 10 msec cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 79, for convenience of explanation, data "58A" in the first 30 msec is referred to as data 1, and data "123" in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 2.

The production control CPU 120 measures 330 msec specified by the child table WD11 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and data 1 and data 2 at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W11 until the time reaches 330 msec. However, after outputting data 1 to data 2, if the time has not yet reached 330 msec, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from data 1. When the time measurement reaches 330 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W11 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W11 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

Note that, as in the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 57 described above, luminance data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the last specified location, and such 10-minute data in the grandchild table is stored in the grandchild table. When the value of the corresponding timer becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, which plays the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of the lamp lighting constantly changing. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group preview luminance data table according to modification)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group preview luminance data table according to a modification. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to light emission, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity light emission, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is defined for each lamp at equal intervals of 20 msec from T101-1 to T101-10, and furthermore, at the last time T101-11. 10 minutes (600,000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T102-1 to T102-10 at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec. W102 includes brightness data that causes one frame lamp to emit light at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to emit light at high brightness, and lamps that emit light at high brightness sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes. For example, in W102, sparse high-brightness data (for example, "A") is defined so that light is emitted at high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps will sparsely emit light at high brightness in accordance with the appearance of the characters advancing in a group in the group preview performance. Furthermore, W102 is designed to cause more frame lamps to emit light with higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 81(c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp from T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp at short intervals of 2 msec from T103-7 to T103-38, and for the frame right lamp, it is continued at long intervals of 14 msec from T103-7 to T103-38. RGB data is defined.

In addition, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that were emitting light at high brightness from around the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned off so that they emit light at low brightness. Or increase the number of lamps that emit light at low brightness. Regarding T103-7 to T103-38, brightness data is specified at 14 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview. ~9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or to low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. Thereby, the position of the frame lamp being turned off or emitting light at low brightness is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko game machine 1 in accordance with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left end of the screen in the group notice.

Furthermore, in W103, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or emitted at low brightness at the time of transition from T103-30. Furthermore, in W103, similarly to W101, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp is turned off or emitted at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the frame lamp when moving to the next performance.

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 167, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. In this embodiment, a performance mode will be described when any of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which pseudo variation is performed twice is selected. In addition, in the figure, hatching indicates how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks.

(Production mode at stage A)
With reference to FIGS. 82 to 104, the presentation mode in stage A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 82(a1), when variable display starts based on one pending memory, decorative patterns are variably displayed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of image display device 5, and The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Maid A (Yume-chan) flying as a character appearing in Stage A is displayed. Note that during variable display, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 82(a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 82(a3), , the second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a4), when the pseudo continuous effect is further performed and the characters "x3" are displayed indicating that the third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 83 (a5). Then, the third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. It becomes a mode.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 84 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68. In the state shown in FIG. 84(a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp emit light with high brightness. Note that during the reach line performance, performance sounds corresponding to the reach line performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 84(a9), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen begins to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes larger.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a10), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and a reach line appears at the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) that connects the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach mode, and is colored with a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become or will become the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a11), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 85 (a12), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 85, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a13), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86 (a14), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86 (a15), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a16), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 87 (b17), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further shrinks, and the reach line at the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (a18), the reach line at the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 87 (a18), if a six-person group preview is executed, the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 88 (a19), and if a background preview is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 97 The process moves to the effect shown in (a101), and if the lamp notice is to be executed, the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 98 (a111).

As mentioned above, the six-person group preview is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and six characters dressed as maids appear in a group. The performance progresses as follows. A background preview is an effect that suggests that the display result of a variable display of a special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and a specific character (for example, a main character, a rare character, etc.) This is an effect that is displayed together with a background (for example, a starry sky background). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a performance that indicates that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A, etc.). It is a performance that lights up and flashes. In the lamp notice, any one lamp or plural lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 may emit light or blink, or lamps provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may emit light or blink. You may blink.

In stage A, a group preview (for example, a six-person group preview or a Boingo group preview) is executed after the reach line performance of the previous change. For example, when the six-person group preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 88 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 77. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K emit light or blink. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. In this manner, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, flashing or flashing a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! An effect occurs where the text image of “!” disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that he or she has effectively pressed the push button 31B during the PUSH effect. Note that the output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview performance (in this example, a six-person group preview) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all the frame lamps emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to displaying a normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 emits or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a22), the six-person group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a23), in the first display period, the main character, maid A (Mume-chan), appears as the first (initial) character. Note that the state shown in FIG. 89 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. This shows a first situation in which a part (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During execution of the six-person group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 61. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the places where characters appear in the group preview begin to emit light with high brightness, and then At the same time, the parts of the lamps that emit light at high brightness will be moved. In addition, the scene where the group preview performance (six-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo preview described below) was performed, images other than images related to the group preview performance (for example, background images, images related to the first half of SP Reach preview, etc.) ), the brightness is reduced. The brightness of the other images, which has decreased during the group preview presentation, gradually returns to the original brightness in stages during the third display period. On the other hand, the fourth symbol 5J and small symbol 5M indicating the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number, the first pending memory display area 5D, the second pending memory display area 5U, the active display area 5A, etc. The display of information related to games with high importance in terms of wins and losses and advantages of games is given a high priority so that the brightness will not be lowered even if a group preview effect is executed.

During the group preview performance, performance sounds corresponding to the group preview performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 51, output of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, The volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period. Note that when the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the second character appears. By this time, the output of the start sound has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a24), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 89 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. Although the whole of Maid B (Jam-chan), who was displayed more than in the first situation and was displayed second, was not displayed yet, a part of Maid B (part of her face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a25), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. As shown in FIG. 90 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear. As shown in FIG. 90 (a27), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a28), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the second character that appears running at the top (leading position) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a29), the second character running at the top (leading position) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a30), the character running at the top and appearing second is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a31), in the second display period, an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the frame lamps sparsely emit light at high brightness in accordance with the characters advancing in groups in the group preview effect. As a result, the frame lamp will emit light or blink in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 92(a32) to 93(a36), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a37), in the third display period, an animation in which the last character appears and runs from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps are also turned off or dimmed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The position of the light will change depending on the brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37), once the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a38), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamp begins to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 94 (a38), since no character is displayed in the right half of the screen, part of the right frame lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 94 (a39), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases.

As shown in FIGS. 95 (a40) and (a41), as the characters gradually disappear in stages, the number of game effect lamps 9 that go out increases. As shown in FIG. 95 (a42), when the last character disappears, the group preview effect ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 96, a comparative example of a six-person group preview will be compared with a six-person group preview according to the present embodiment. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 96 (a201), similarly to the present embodiment shown in FIG. This is the first situation in which a part of the face (in this example, part of the face) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 89 (a24), while the whole of the maid A that was initially displayed is not displayed yet, a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and In contrast to the second situation in which the entirety of the maid B (Jam-chan) displayed is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 96 (a202), the second maid B does not appear, the maid A continues to run, and the entire maid A is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 96 (a203), the second maid B appears only after the first maid A has run to the left of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not appear to be a group preview presentation.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 95, an animation in which multiple characters appear and run one after another without any gaps is displayed, so multiple characters advance as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful performance. Further, since the number of characters that overtake other characters is smaller than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group preview performance from becoming too complicated. Note that the number of characters that overtake other characters may be greater than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, a lively group preview performance can be shown to the player.

When the background preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 97 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 77.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH performance, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all the frame lamps emit light with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (a103), as a background preview, a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed on an image display device with a specific background (in this example, a starry sky background). 5 is displayed on the screen. Further, during the performance of the background preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the performance of the background preview based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background preview.

When the lamp preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 98 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 77.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all the frame lamps emit light with high brightness.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (a113), a lamp preview is executed, and a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, accessory lamp 9A, etc.) emits or blinks. Incidentally, effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp preview.

After the third display period of the group notice ends as shown in FIG. 95 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 97 (a103) or the lamp notice shown in FIG. 98 (a113) ends, As shown in FIG. 103, a symbol feeding effect is executed. The symbol feeding performance is based on whether or not the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed (in this embodiment, the ornamental symbol in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C) stops in the ornamental symbol that is in the reach mode, and the ornament that stops. This is a performance that prompts the player to find out whether or not the symbols are decorative symbols constituting a jackpot symbol. During the symbol feeding performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding performance based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding effect.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a43), when the symbol feeding effect starts, the variable displaying decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) to start variable display. At this time, the symbol feeding performance starts from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in the reach mode (i.e., the ornamental symbol that constitutes the jackpot), but the starting position is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 99(a44) to 100(a48), the decorative pattern in the center continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 101 (a49) to 102 (a54), as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIGS. 103 (a55) to (a57). As shown, the central decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 103 (a57), when the decorative pattern approximately in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the pattern feeding effect ends.

After the symbol feeding effect has been completed, as shown in FIGS. 104 (a58) and (a59), an effect called whiteout is applied to the image including the character image and the decorative pattern "3" in reach mode. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the image including the character image and the decorative pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Figure 104 (a59), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the change that was switched on the back side changes to the screen. appear above.

(Production mode in the first half of SP reach)
With reference to FIGS. 105 to 113, the production mode in the first half of SP reach will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 105 (a61) and (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the character animation is displayed until the title image of SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or may be a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 105 (a63), the title of SP Reach is displayed. In this embodiment, as an SP reach performance, a maid character such as Yumu-chan catches Bakushu, so the title "Catch Bakushu!" is displayed. During the performance of the first half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 106 (c1), when the first half of the SP reach is performed, an image of Maid A (Yume-chan) standing in a dignified position is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 106(c2), an image in which Bakuchu, the opponent's character (enemy character), is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 106(c3) to 107(c5), an animation is displayed in which Maid A chases the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Figure 107 (c6), after an animation in which Maid A jumps at Bakuchu is displayed, if you lose (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 9), the effect shifts to the effect shown in Figure 108 (c11). However, when there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern with main fluctuation number 20), the game will shift to the production shown in Figure 110 (c21), and if it moves to the second half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern with main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23), or When moving to the final reach (in the case of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 15 and 26), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c31).

When a loss is confirmed in the first half of SP reach, after the performance shown in FIG. 107 (c6), the process shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 108 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 108 (c11), an image of Maid A depressed because she was unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol "4" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (c12), due to a production effect called blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that were in a losing state is changed. It gradually becomes black, and as shown in Figure 108 (c13), eventually the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which were lost, become completely invisible. .

After that, as shown in Figures 109 (c14) and (c15), when the transparency of the entire front screen that has become black due to blackout is gradually increased, the normal background that was switched on the back side A staged image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

When a jackpot is confirmed in the first half of SP reach, after the performance shown in FIG. 107 (c6), the process shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 110 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 110 (c21), an image of Maid A catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. 3" stops.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 110 (c22), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 110 (c23). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 111 (c24) and (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

When moving to the second half of SP reach or the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 107 (c6), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c31). In the production shown in FIG. 113 (c31), an image of Maid A depressed because she could not catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol "4" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (c32), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that are lost is gradually blackened. Up to this point, the effect is the same as when the player loses in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 108 (c11) and (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 113 (c33), when moving to the second half of SP reach or the final reach, an effect is performed in which the movable body 32 falls, which did not occur when the player lost in the first half of SP reach.

Then, after the effect of the movable body 32 falling is executed, when moving to the latter half of SP reach (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c41), and the final When shifting to reach (in the case of variation patterns of main variation numbers 15 and 26), the production shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c71). In this way, among the fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot, there are fluctuation patterns that pretend that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, and then shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach. As a result, from the player's perspective, once he thinks that he will lose in the first half of the SP reach, he will be able to move to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Production mode in the second half of SP reach)
With reference to FIGS. 114 to 120, the production mode in the second half of SP reach will be explained.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c33), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c41), character images, background images, etc. become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Figure 114 (c42), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image of the second half of the SP reach that had been switched on the back side appears. It becomes visible. During the performance of the second half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the second half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the second half of SP reach.

As shown in Figure 114 (c42), when the second half of SP Reach is performed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war against Bakuchu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (c43) to FIG. 115 (c45), an animation is displayed in which Maid A and Maid B chase the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Fig. 114 (c46), after an animation in which Maid A and Maid B jump at Bakuchu is displayed, the case of losing (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 12) is shown in Fig. 116 (c51). When the game moves to the production and there is a jackpot (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 23), it shifts to the production shown in Figure 118 (c61), and when it moves to the final reach (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation numbers 15 and 26) The process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c71).

If the loss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in Figure 115 (c46), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 118 (c51). In the production shown in FIG. 118 (c51), an image of Maid A and Maid B depressed because they were unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (c52), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which have become lose modes, becomes black in stages, As shown in FIG. 116 (c53), eventually the character image and the image including the losing decorative patterns "3", "4", and "3" disappear completely.

After that, as shown in Figures 117 (c54) and (c55), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the normal background that had been switched on the back side A staged image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

If the jackpot is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in Figure 115 (c46), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 118 (c61). In the performance shown in FIG. 118 (c61), an image of Maid A and Maid B catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "3" stops.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 118 (c62), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 118 (c63). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c64) and (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 120 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

(Production mode at final reach)
With reference to FIGS. 121 to 131, the production mode in the final reach will be explained.

When moving to the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 115 (c46), the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c71). When moving to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black, as shown in Figure 121 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect appears in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 121 (c72). be done. After that, as shown in Figure 121 (c73), a production is executed to notify the start of the final reach, and the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed across the screen, along with the message "Let's go!" ” is displayed. Note that the light effect display as shown in FIG. 121 (c72) is a combination of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 121 (c71) and the effect in which the main character's face image is displayed as shown in FIG. 121 (c73). It is deliberately inserted in between. As a result, by the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c72), it is possible to more easily convey to the player that the final reach has been reached.

After that, the performance during the final reach will be executed. During the second half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 122 (c74), an image of maid A giving a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in Figures 122 (c75) to 122 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at multiple timings, and as shown in Figure 122 (c79), an image of the entire sentence is displayed. This indicates the theme of the performance that will be executed at the final reach. In this example, "all members gather" is indicated.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 124 (c80) to 125 (c85), animations are displayed at multiple timings to introduce the characters that will appear in the final reach performance. For example, in this example, supporting characters appear in order, such as Maid F, Maid E, Maid D, Maid C, Maid B, Maid A, etc., and near the end (or in the second half), characters with high priority such as the main character appear. A character appears. Note that characters with a high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable that a character with a high priority such as the main character appear at the beginning (or the first half) or near the end (or the second half) so that it stands out more than a character with a low priority such as a supporting character.

After that, as shown in Figure 126 (c86), when the final reach effect is executed, an image of the six characters that appeared in the six-person group preview standing up and declaring war against Bakuchu is displayed. be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 126 (c87) to 127 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 127 (c90), after an animation in which six characters chase a blowjob is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 127 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit in which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the words "Close!!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 127 (c91), in the event of a loss (in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 15), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 128 (c101), and in the event of a jackpot (In the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 129 (c111).

If a loss is confirmed in the final reach, after the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger performance shown in FIG. 127 (c91), the performance shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 128 (c101). In the production shown in FIG. 128 (c101), an image of six characters depressed because they were unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (c102), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that have become lose modes becomes black in stages, As shown in FIG. 128 (c103), eventually the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which are in the losing mode, become completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if you gradually increase the transparency of the entire front screen that has become black due to blackout, the normal background effect image that was switched on the back side will appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

When a jackpot is confirmed in the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c91), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 129 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 129 (c111), an image of six characters catching Bakuchu is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. Stop.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 129 (c112), the decorative patterns consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expand in stages, and as shown in Figure 129 (c113). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 130 (c114) and (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 131 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

(Production mode at stage B)
With reference to FIGS. 132 to 152, the production mode in stage B will be described.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b1), when the variable display starts based on one pending memory, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, and The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Bakuchu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. Note that during variable display, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 132 (b3), , a second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b4), when the pseudo continuous effect is further performed and the characters "x3" indicating that the third variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 133 (b5). Then, the third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. It becomes a mode.

As shown in FIG. 134 (b7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 134 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68. Note that the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68 are the same as the brightness data tables used in the stage A reach line performance. In the state shown in FIG. 134(b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp emit light with high brightness. Note that during the reach line performance, performance sounds corresponding to the reach line performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 134 (b9), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen begins to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes larger.

As shown in FIG. 135 (b10), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and a reach line appears at the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) that connects the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach mode, and is colored with a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become or will become the reach mode. Note that the reach line that appears in stage B may be the same as the reach line that appears in stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, etc., for example.

As shown in FIG. 135 (b11), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 135 (b12), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 135, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 136 (b13), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 136 (b14), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 136 (b15), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 136, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b16), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 137 (b17), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further shrinks, and the reach line at the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (b18), the reach line at the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 137 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 138 to 142. During the symbol feeding performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding performance based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding effect.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b19), when the symbol feeding effect starts, the variable displaying decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) to start variable display. At this time, the symbol feeding performance starts from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in the reach mode (i.e., the ornamental symbol that constitutes the jackpot), but the starting position is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 138(b20) to 139(b24), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (b25) to FIG. 141 (b30), as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIG. 142 (b31) to (b33). As shown, the central decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 142 (b33), when the decorative pattern approximately in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the pattern feeding effect ends.

After the symbol feeding effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 143 (b34) and (b35), due to whiteout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol "3" in the ready-to-reach mode is gradually whitened. Eventually, the image including the character image and the decorative pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode disappears completely. After that, as shown in Figure 143 (b36), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the change that was switched on the back side changes to the screen. appear above.

As shown in FIGS. 144 (b37) and (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the character animation is displayed until the title image of SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or may be a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 144 (b39), the title of SP Reach ("Catch the Bakuchu!") is displayed. During the performance of the first half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach.

In stage B, a group preview (for example, a Bakuchu preview or a Boingo group preview) is executed during a period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-change is being displayed. For example, when the Bakuchu group preview is executed during the period when the title of the first half of SP reach is being displayed, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 145 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 77. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K emit light or blink. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. In this manner, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, flashing or flashing a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 145 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that he or she has effectively pressed the push button 31B during the PUSH effect. Note that the output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview performance (in this example, the Bakuchu group preview) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all the frame lamps emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 145 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 emits or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b43), the Bakuchu group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 146 (b44), while the entirety of the first (first) character is not yet displayed, a part of the first character (in this example, part of the face) is not displayed. ) is displayed, representing the first situation.

During execution of the Bakuchu group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the group preview effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 61. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the parts where the characters appear in the group preview begin to emit light with high brightness, and then At the same time, the parts of the lamps that emit light at high brightness will be moved.

During the group preview performance, performance sounds corresponding to the group preview performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 51, output of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, The volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period. Note that when the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the second character appears. By this time, the output of the start sound has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b45), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 146 (b45) is such that while the entire character that was initially displayed has not been displayed yet, a part of the character that was displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation, and This represents a second situation in which a part of the second character (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed while the entire character displayed in the second position is not yet displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 147 (b46) to (b48), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. Note that the display area on the screen used in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the SP first half title preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 148 (b49), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the first character displayed running at the top reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 148 (b50), the first character displayed running at the top (leading position) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 148 (b51), the first character displayed running at the top disappears from the left end of the screen first. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 149 (b52), in the second display period, an animation in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the frame lamps sparsely emit light at high brightness in accordance with the characters advancing in groups in the group preview effect. As a result, the frame lamp will emit light or blink in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (b52) to FIG. 150 (b57), an animation in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side is displayed.

When the characters run in a group from the left side of the screen to the right side, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' .

As shown in FIG. 151 (b58), in the third display period, an animation in which the last character appears and runs from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps are also turned off or dimmed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The position of the light will change depending on the brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 151 (b58), once the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b59), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamp begins to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (b59), since no character is displayed in the right half of the screen, part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 151 (b60), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases.

As shown in FIG. 151, as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the title display of ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' gradually reappears in stages. At this time, if you have won the SP first half title preview lottery, the SP first half title preview will be performed by changing the display format (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch the Bakuchu!" . For example, as shown in Figure 144 (b39), before the Bakuchu group preview is executed, the text "Catch the Bakchu!" in the title display in the first half of SP Reach is white, but as shown in Figure 150 (b56) As shown in , when the character image in the group preview is subsequently displayed on the layer in front of the layer where the title is being displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or becomes invisible. While the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview, the text "Catch Bakuchu!" in the title display switches to red, and as shown in Figures 151 (b59) and (b60), the characters in the group preview disappears to the left edge of the screen, and the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (b61) and (b62), as the characters gradually disappear in stages, the number of game effect lamps 9 that go out increases. As shown in FIG. 152 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group preview effect ends. Thereafter, the process shifts to the first half of SP reach shown in FIG. 106(c1).

(Boingo group preview)
With reference to FIGS. 153 to 162, the presentation mode of the Boingo group preview will be described.

In the six-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview described above, a plurality of characters advance as a group from the right edge of the screen toward the left edge. In this way, the six-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview were effects in which the characters progressed in the X-axis direction on the XY plane shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the Boingo group preview, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group preview is a 3D performance in which characters advance in a three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 153 to 158 are diagrams for explaining the production mode when the Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. Note that even when the Boingo group is executed in stage B, the performance mode is the same as that shown in FIGS. 153 to 158. Although not shown, the Boingo group preview performance also includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, similar to the six-person group preview performance and the Bakuchu group preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 153 (d1), the Boingo group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

During execution of the Boingo group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance, based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 55 to 61, for example. For example, in the group preview, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the locations where the characters appear begin to emit light with high brightness, and then the locations of the lamps that emit high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the characters advance. Furthermore, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps sparsely emit light at high brightness in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups. As a result, the frame lamp will emit light or blink in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running.

As shown in FIG. 153(d2), a preceding image with a light effect is displayed as a preliminary effect before the character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is a group appearance point where the character group appears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153(d3), the first character appears from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in Figures 154 (d4) and (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually moves towards the screen. be done. As shown in FIG. 154 (d6), as the initially displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 155 (d7) to (d9), the characters form a group and advance from the depth side of the screen toward the front side, so that the characters cover the entire screen. As shown in FIGS. 156 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and advances from the depth side of the screen toward the front side.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 157 (d13) and (d14), as the last character progresses from the depth side of the screen toward the front side, it comes to cover most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (d15), the last character is displayed in an enlarged manner from one end of the screen to the other end, and the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in Figures 158 (d16) and (d17), as the last character disappears from the screen, the original background image is displayed, and as shown in Figure 153 (d18), when the last character disappears, the original background image is displayed. The group preview performance ends.

FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining details of the Boingo group notice. 159(A) to (F) correspond to FIGS. 153(d3) to 154(d6), and FIGS. 155(d8) and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 159(A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 159(B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the initially displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 159(E) and (F), even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so the subsequent character image must not be placed. Good too.

Here, a comparative example of a Boingo group notice and a Boingo group notice according to this embodiment will be compared with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 160, a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the preceding image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 153 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the strange feeling of a character suddenly appearing large, it is necessary to create an animation in which the character is displayed small and then gradually enlarged, as shown in Figures 160 and 161. .

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIG. 160 (d101) to FIG. 161 (d105) is performed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 153 (d3) as shown in FIG. 161 (d106). This requires additional production time, and images for animation must also be created. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153 (d2) and (d3), a preliminary image with a light effect is displayed as a preliminary effect before the character appears. By displaying the first character from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image due to the effect, it is possible to display the character from the beginning at a certain size (the size shown in Figure 153 (d3) and Figure 161 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Variation example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a Boingo group notice according to a modification is executed. The example shown in FIG. 162 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 158. For example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 153 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview on the layer in front of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, the image shown in FIG. 162 (d103) , the normal background image may be switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. In this way, the group preview performance may be executed while the preview performance, such as the SP first half title preview performance, is being executed.

Further, the title image in the first half of the SP in the Boingo group preview may be changed in display mode as shown in FIG. 152 to foretell a jackpot. Furthermore, instead of enlarging the last character to cover the entire screen, the next effect may be switched to using an animation in which the background image used for the group preview effect is rolled up like a scroll.

(dog group notice)
With reference to FIGS. 163 to 165, the presentation mode of the dog group notice will be explained.

In this embodiment, a six-person group preview, a Bakushuu preview, and a Boingo group preview are exemplified as group preview performances, but the pachinko game machine 1 is also known as a dog group preview as shown in FIGS. 163 to 165. It may also be possible to execute a group preview effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163(e1), the first character is displayed, then multiple dog characters appear one after another as shown in FIG. 163(e2), and then as shown in FIG. 163(e3). The screen area may be covered by a group of characters as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 164 (e4) to (e6), as the last displayed character disappears, the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 163 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character images in the group preview performance on the layer in front of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, the image shown in FIG. 164 (e6) , the normal background image is switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, a title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the performance of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image in the first half of the SP in the dog group preview may be changed in display mode as shown in FIG. 152 to announce a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 165, when comparing the six-person group notice and the dog group notice, the distance between the first character displayed in the dog group notice and the last character displayed (the length between them on the (b) X2 is shorter than the distance (the length between them on the X axis) X1 between the first character displayed and the last character displayed in the six-person group preview. Further, since the execution times are the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group preview is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six person group preview. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group preview is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six person group preview. In addition, the dog group preview performance has a higher expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot than the six-person group preview performance, and the dog group preview performance has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the six-person group preview performance.

(Execution of group preview performance during reach line performance)
With reference to FIG. 166 and FIG. 167, the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line will be described.

As shown in FIG. 166(f1), in a state where the reach line effect is executed, the group preview effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 166(f2) to (f4), and then, in the state shown in FIGS. ), a symbol feeding effect may be executed.

[Character movements in group preview production]
Next, the movements of the characters in the group preview presentation will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 168 to 175.

FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the movement of the character (stepping version) during normal times. FIGS. 169 and 170 are diagrams for explaining the movement of a character in normal times (scroll ver.). The normal state is, for example, a state before a ready-to-win effect as shown in FIGS. 82 and 132 is performed. Further, the normal time may include a state in which the group preview performance is not performed during the ready-to-reach performance. Note that the normal performance screens (backgrounds, etc.) shown in FIGS. 168 to 170 are different from the normal performance screen on stage A shown in FIG. 82 and the normal performance screen on stage B shown in FIG. However, the normal performance screen shown in FIG. 82 and the normal performance screen shown in FIG. 132 may be replaced with the normal performance screens shown in FIGS. 168 to 170.

As shown in Figure 168, the way the character moves during normal times is that the character is always displayed and steps, while the background displayed on the back side of the character moves (scrolls) on the screen. There is a method of making it appear to the player that the character is moving.

For example, as shown in Figures 168 (A1) to (A3), a character (Yumemu-chan) is stepping in the center of the screen, and behind her the background image of the city changes from one side (right side) of the screen to the other. It is moving towards the side (left side). This allows the player to see the character at the center of the screen as if it were moving through the city.

Another way to show the movement of the character in normal times is as shown in Figures 169 and 170, where the character moves (scrolls) on the screen while the background displayed behind the character does not move. There is a method of making it appear to the player that the character is moving.

For example, as shown in Figures 169 (B1) to (B3), the character (Yumemu-chan) is moving from one side (right side) of the screen to the other side (left side), but the back side of the character is moving toward the other side (left side). The background image is not moving. This allows the player to see the characters appearing on the screen as if they were moving through the city. Furthermore, in such movement of the character, an effect is also performed in which the character hides the pending display (for example, the active display in the active display area 5A) as shown in FIG. 169 (B3). Then, when the character moves further and the pending display appears, the pending display does not change as shown in FIG. 170 (B4-1), or the pending display does not change as shown in FIG. 170 (B4-2). , the pending display may change (for example, the color or shape of the active display changes), thereby indicating that the changing symbol will become a jackpot symbol. Specifically, if the probability of a fluctuating symbol becoming a jackpot symbol is higher when the pending display does not change than when the pending display does not change, then It is possible to make the player expect a jackpot when the display changes.

FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the actions of the characters during the group preview presentation and during normal times. Note that in this embodiment, an image of character A (Yumemu-chan) is used as a group preview presentation and an explanation of the character's movements in normal times, but the image may be applied to other characters B to F.

In FIG. 171(a), images of characters used in the group preview presentation are shown. As shown in FIG. 171(a), six types of images, image A to image F, are used as character images in the group preview presentation. The "first image" is illustrated as image A, the "second image" is illustrated as image B and image C, the "third image" is illustrated as image D and image E, and the "fourth image" is illustrated as image F, respectively. In addition, in the group preview effect, each image from image A to image F is displayed in order, but at that time, image A and image F are displayed for 5 frames, image B and image E are displayed for 2 frames, C and image D are each displayed for one frame. As described above, one frame corresponds to approximately 33.3 msec. Note that the number of character images in the group preview presentation is not limited to six (six types), but may be composed of other even numbers such as four (four types) or eight (eight types).

In FIG. 171(b), an image of a character used in normal times is shown. As shown in FIG. 171(b), ten types of images such as image H to image Q are used as character images in normal times. All images H to Q are used for 30 frames.

FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining the behavior of the character during normal times. As shown in FIG. 172, in normal times, each of images H to Q is displayed on the screen in order so as to rotate around, thereby expressing the movement of the character walking on the screen.

FIGS. 173 to 175 are diagrams for explaining the actions of the characters during the group preview presentation. As shown in FIG. 173, during the group preview performance, images A to F are used in order and displayed on the screen in a circular motion to express an action such as characters running away on the screen. For example, in one cycle of image display, image A is displayed for 5 frames (approximately 165 msec), then image B is displayed for 2 frames (approximately 66 msec), and then image C is displayed for 1 frame (approximately 66 msec). Next, image D is displayed for 1 frame (approximately 33 msec), then image E is displayed for 2 frames (approximately 66 msec), and then image F is displayed for 5 frames (approximately 165 msec). ) is displayed, then image E is displayed for two frames (approximately 66 msec), then image D is displayed for one frame (approximately 33 msec), and then image C is displayed for one frame (approximately 33 msec). Then, image B is displayed for two frames (approximately 66 msec).

In this way, in one cycle of the animation in the group preview presentation, the display time of images A and F is longer than that of the other images B to E. By switching and displaying each image in turn in this manner, in the group preview performance, an animation in which a character enters the screen, frames out of the screen, and runs away is displayed.

Each character image used in the group preview presentation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 174. Note that in FIGS. 174 and 175, the vertical direction is defined as 0 degrees with the character as the axis. Furthermore, in FIGS. 174 and 175, the positions of the characters' hands will be described, and the descriptions of the positions of the feet will be omitted. Note that in this embodiment, a character's "hand" and "arm" are defined as the same thing. That is, in this embodiment, the position of the character's hand can also be said to be the position of the character's arm.

As shown in FIG. 174(a), image A is the first image in which the position of the character's hand (arm) is located at the highest point on the character's advancing direction side of the hand swing width in the group preview animation. This is an image that serves as the location. For example, in image A, the character's right hand (right arm) is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction in the direction of movement, and the character's left hand (left arm) is in the opposite direction (opposite to the direction of movement). The position is tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction. In this case, the "first position" is exemplified as a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side. Further, the "highest point on the traveling direction side" is exemplified as a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side. Note that the "highest point on the moving direction side" is not limited to a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the moving direction side, but is the highest point on the moving direction side of the character within the hand swing width in a given animation. It may be any position as long as it is located.

As shown in FIG. 174(b), image B is an image in which the character's hand is positioned at a second position close to the first position in the direction of movement. For example, in image B, the position of the character's right hand is tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the advancing direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side. Note that when image B is an example of the second image, the "second position" is exemplified as a position tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side.

As shown in FIG. 174(c), image C is an image in which the character's hand is positioned at a second position close to the first position in the direction of movement. For example, in image C, the position of the character's right hand is tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction in the advancing direction, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction in the opposite direction. Note that when image C is an example of the second image, the "second position" is exemplified as a position tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side.

As shown in FIG. 174(f), in image F, the position of the character's hand is located at the highest point on the opposite side of the character's hand swing width in the group preview animation, and is at the first position. This is an image at the fourth position of the pair. For example, in image F, the position of the character's right hand is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the forward direction side. In this case, the "fourth position" is exemplified as a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side. Further, the "highest point on the opposite direction side" is exemplified as a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side. Note that the "highest point on the opposite side" is not limited to a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the reverse side, but is the highest point on the opposite side of the character within the hand swing width in a given animation. It may be any position as long as it is located.

As shown in FIG. 174(e), image E is an image in which the character's hand position is at a third position close to the fourth position in the opposite direction. For example, in image E, the position of the character's right hand is at a position inclined at 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is at a position at a position inclined at 90 degrees from the vertical direction at the forward direction side. Note that when image E is an example of the third image, the "third position" is exemplified as a position tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side.

As shown in FIG. 174(d), image D is an image in which the character's hand position is at a third position close to the fourth position on the opposite direction side. For example, in image F, the position of the character's right hand is tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the forward direction side. Note that when image D is an example of the third image, the "third position" is exemplified as a position tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side.

The first position is a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction in the traveling direction, and the fourth position is a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction in the opposite direction, so image A (first image) and image F ( (4th image) are paired with the same absolute angle (100 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character.

Further, the second position in the case of image B (second image) is a position tilted by 90 degrees from the vertical direction in the traveling direction, and the third position in the case of image E (third image) is a position tilted from the vertical direction in the opposite direction. Since the position is tilted 90 degrees from the direction, images B and E form a pair with the same absolute angle (90 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character. Alternatively, the second position in the case of image C (second image) is a position tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction in the traveling direction, and the third position in the case of image D (third image) is a position tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction in the opposite direction. Since the position is tilted 80 degrees from the direction, images C and D form a pair with the same absolute angle (80 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character.

Further, in image A (first image), the position of the character's hand is tilted from the vertical direction more than in image B and image C (second image), and the character's hand is raised the most. Therefore, image A is a more characteristic animation image than image B or image C. In image F (fourth image), the position of the character's hand is tilted from the vertical direction than in image D and image E (third image), and the character's hand is swung up the most in pair with the first image. It is. Therefore, image F is a more characteristic animation image than image D or image E. Such characteristic images A and F are not used in normal times when an animation of a character walking is displayed.

By switching and displaying such a plurality of images, in the group preview effect, images are displayed such that a running character moves faster with its hands or feet than a normally walking character. Here, in the group preview production, multiple types of images are used in which the character's hand position is in a predetermined position, but as shown in FIGS. 173 and 175, depending on the position of the character's hand, the group preview There are images that are not used in the production.

For example, if the character's hand position is in the first position (a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction in the direction of movement as shown in Figure 174(a)) and in the fourth position (in the opposite direction as shown in Figure 174(f)), The intermediate position between the two positions (the position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction) is defined as the intermediate position (that is, the vertical direction at 0 degrees). In the group preview production, an image in which the character's hand is located between the intermediate position (vertical direction) and the second position (position tilted 80 degrees or 90 degrees from the vertical direction in the direction of movement) is not used. Furthermore, images in which the character's hand is located between the intermediate position (vertical direction) and the third position (position tilted 80 degrees or 90 degrees from the vertical direction in the opposite direction) are not used. .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 175(g), in the group preview performance, the right hand of the character is positioned at a position tilted by an angle smaller than 10 degrees from the intermediate position (vertical direction) in the direction of movement. No images may be used. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 175(h), in the group preview presentation, an image in which the right hand of the character is located at a position tilted by an angle smaller than 10 degrees from the intermediate position (vertical direction) in the opposite direction is not used. I can't. Furthermore, although not shown, images in which the character's hand is in an intermediate position (in the vertical direction) are also not used in the group preview performance. Note that an image in which the character's hand is in an intermediate position (in the vertical direction) is never used even in normal times.

The group preview performance is a performance in which multiple characters run across the screen, giving a sense of speed and realism. In order to make the animation smooth in the group preview production, it is preferable to use more images, but the group preview production is a production in which multiple characters run across the screen, and image A Since characteristic images such as (first image) and image F (fourth image) are used, even if some of the images between them are omitted and the images are thinned out, it will be presented to the player as a smooth animation. be able to. In this way, even if characteristic images are used and some images in between are omitted, a suitable group preview effect can be provided.

On the other hand, in the case of characters that normally walk as shown in Figures 168 to 170, the movement of the characters is slow, so unless more images than those in the group preview presentation are used, the roughness of the animation will become noticeable. . In this embodiment, images for 30 frames are normally used. However, as described above, in the group preview performance, even if some images are omitted, it can be shown to the player as a smooth animation, so the designer does not need to prepare many images.

Furthermore, characteristic images such as image A (first image) and image F (fourth image) take longer to display (have a larger number of frames) than other images B to E; Accordingly, the animation in the group preview performance can be made to stand out, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

[Main composition and effects]
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Crowd preview performance) and
Blessing effect execution means for executing a congratulatory effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that displays an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result (for example, a process for executing a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) ) and,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42) period),
The blessing performance can be performed after the group performance (for example, the fanfare performance shown in FIGS. 110 to 112 is performed after the six-person group preview performance shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 is performed),
If it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result that is different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of a variation pattern of variation number 9), and the variable display is In the first predetermined period (for example, the period T1+T2 shown in FIG. 52) until the display suggests that the display is a losing display result, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 52 and 53),
In cases where it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation pattern of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the variable display has not changed since the start of the variable display. In the second predetermined period (for example, T3+T4 period, T5+T6 period, T7+T8 period) until the specific display result is suggested, the first display period is the first half of the second predetermined period. starts (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 52 and 53).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, the feeling of elation may fade over time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but if the result of the variable display is a fluctuating pattern that results in a losing display, in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group preview performance, the feeling of elation can be sustained or revived. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, a fanfare performance that is a blessing performance is performed, so the group preview performance is performed in the first half of the variable display time to create a feeling of elation. , Even if the feeling of elation fades over time, it can be sustained or rekindled through a blessing performance.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. That is, even if the specific display result is derived, it is a display result for controlling the gaming state to be advantageous. In this embodiment, a jackpot occurs when the combination of light emission modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of light emission modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the light emission corresponding to the jackpot occurs. A combination of aspects results in a specific display result. In addition, a jackpot occurs when the combination of light emission modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of light emission modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of light emission modes corresponding to the jackpot is specified. The result will be displayed. Furthermore, the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 is a special special pattern (for example, a jackpot such as "3, 3, 3" or "7, 7, 7"). A jackpot occurs when the machine stops at a symbol combination), and the display of the specific special symbol becomes the specific display result.

The "losing display result" is a display result that is different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the losing display result. That is, the losing display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to be advantageous even if it is derived. In this embodiment, when the combination of light emitting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a loss, the result of the game becomes a loss. A combination of corresponding light emitting modes becomes a losing display result. In addition, when the combination of light emitting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the light emitting mode corresponding to the loss. The combination will result in a loss display. Furthermore, the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 become a specific predetermined pattern (for example, a losing pattern combination such as "3, 2, 3") and stop. Sometimes, the result of the game is a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol becomes a loss display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the gaming value imparting rate (for example, the payout rate of game balls) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In this embodiment, a jackpot game state that is controlled when each of normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 9 occur is exemplified as an advantageous state. The advantageous state may be a small winning game state that is controlled when a small winning occurs, or may be a variable probability state or a time saving state.

The "new display of a character" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group preview presentation, or may be a different type of character from the character first displayed in the group preview presentation. good.

"Blessing performance" is a performance that displays an image that congratulates the variable display result having become a specific display result, and is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the variable display display result becoming a specific display result. It is also a performance that displays images that celebrate things. "Congratulate" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, "bless" improves the player's expectations for an advantageous state by suggesting or informing that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. This includes causing someone to do something. For example, the blessing effect is that the combination of light emission modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of light emission modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the special figure 2 variable display section of the special figure LED board 20 22 is a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a jackpot, or the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are a specific special symbol ( This includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that a jackpot symbol has been reached or that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

"The blessing performance can be performed after the group performance" means that the group preview performance is executed within the variable display based on the 1 pending memory, and then the blessing performance is executed within the variable display based on the 1 pending memory. Including that the performance is executed. In addition, "the blessing performance can be executed after the group performance" means that the display result of the variable display based on the first pending memory is a specific display result. When a group preview effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or foretells the display result before the display result starts, the group preview effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the suspended memory of the 1 is started and the 1 is displayed. This includes executing a blessing effect within the variable display based on the reserved memory.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, and in this embodiment, FIGS. 52 and 53 This is exemplified by the period T1+T2 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a loss display result" means that the combination of light emission modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of light emission modes corresponding to a loss. , the combination of light emitting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is the combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a loss; and the decorative pattern display area of the image display device 5. This includes that the decorative symbols variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R become a specific predetermined symbol (losing symbol combination) and then stop. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a loss display result, the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a win display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" indicates to the player that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result due to the movable body 32 not operating at a specific timing, or Including informing. Note that the specific timing is the timing at which an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, is performed, and when the player operates the operating means, the movable body 32 operates when the player wins the jackpot. It's okay.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and in this embodiment, the period shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is This is exemplified by the period T3+T4, the period T5+T6, and the period T7+T8 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of light emission modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of light emission modes corresponding to a jackpot. , the combination of light emission modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of light emission modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the display is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. This includes that the decorative pattern that is being played becomes a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a loss display result, the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a win display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the movement of the movable body 32 at a specific timing suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, or Including informing. Note that the specific timing is the timing at which an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, is performed, and when the player operates the operating means, the movable body 32 operates when the player wins the jackpot. It's okay.

(1-2) The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is longer than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 51).

From this, by making the second display period in which characters appear one after another in the group preview presentation the longest period, it is possible to make the group preview presentation more powerful. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from when a character first appears to when the character first leaves to the shortest period, it is possible to prevent group preview effects from being suddenly executed. Can be done.

(1-3) The first character displayed in the first display period is a character with a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yumu-chan, the main character).

As a result, the first character to appear in a group preview performance is a high-priority character such as the main character, and is a character familiar to the player, but after that, characters that appear less frequently than the main character in other performances, etc. By appearing in the group preview performance, the player can be surprised about the group preview performance and can be made to feel that it is a rare performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

"Characters with high priority" include characters that have the highest priority among the main character and characters other than the main character that appear in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the performance.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of a variation pattern with variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the display of the character in the group effect is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 52 and 53).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, even if the group preview effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group preview effect will be executed near the second half even in the first half. This allows the lingering impression of the group preview performance to be extended to a later stage.

(1-5) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) indicates that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. after making it appear that the variable display result is the specific display result (for example, a variation pattern with variation numbers 23 and 26),
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is One display period starts (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 52 and 53).

As a result, even in the case of a rescue pattern in which the display result of the variable display is made to appear to be a loss display result, and the display result of the variable display is a win display result, the fanfare performance, which is a blessing performance, is executed. , a group preview performance is performed during the first half of the variable display time to create a feeling of elation, and even if the elation fades over time, a blessing performance is used to maintain or revive the elation. You can

(1-6) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result In the case of a pattern that suggests that it is (for example, the variation pattern of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result, A common display is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 131).

As a result, for example, the variation pattern with variation number 9 and the variation pattern with variation number 20 will perform a common effect until the display result is finalized, and the variation pattern with variation number 12 and the variation pattern with variation number 23 will display the same effect. A common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and a common effect is executed between the variation pattern with variation number 15 and the variation pattern with variation number 26 until the display result is confirmed. It is possible to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the group preview performance is executed while the player is in the middle of the game.

Note that the display result of the variable display is a pattern that suggests that the display result is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15), and the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result. (For example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) are different displays until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result. may be performed.

Thereby, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance is executed while mutually different performances are being executed.

(1-7) The execution period of the group performance and a preview performance that is different from the group preview and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, SP first half title preview performance) The execution period of
The preview performance ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the preview effect (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 146 to 152).

Thereby, even if the group preview performance is executed while a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed, the SP first half title preview performance can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the preview effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 146 to 152).

Thereby, when a preview performance such as an SP first half title preview performance is being executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the group preview performance. Note that the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance and the group preview performance do not start to be executed at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than when the preview effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. , group previews are more reliable than SP first half title previews).

As a result, other preview performances with lower expectations for jackpots than the group preview performances will not be displayed on the front layer, which has a higher priority than the group preview performances, so that players will not be able to hit the jackpot in a favorable manner. It is possible to make suggestions. In this manner, in the present embodiment, a performance with a low expectation level of a jackpot is not placed in front of a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness of both the background display and the display in the preview effect decreases, while the display of information regarding the game (for example, the number of first pending memories and the second pending memory) decreases in brightness. The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J showing the number, the small symbol 5M, the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when a group preview effect is executed, the brightness of the background display and images related to other preview effects (for example, images related to the SP first half title preview effect, which has lower expectations than the group preview effect) are lowered, while We give high priority to the display of information related to games that are of high importance to players in terms of winnings, losses, and advantages, and do not lower the brightness even when the group preview effect is executed. Can show information.

(2-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42)) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 89).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in a group preview performance, it is possible to avoid creating doubts as to whether or not this is a group preview performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

The "first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed" means that the entire initially displayed character is still displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 48(a). A situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 while not being displayed, or a situation where the gaming machine frame 3 is displayed as an image, as shown in FIG. 89(a). In the display area that is visible to the player while covering the screen of the device 5, the entirety of the initially displayed character is not yet displayed, but the character is displayed at the edge of the display area that is visible to the player. Including situations where part of the is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first character appearing is not completely visible, but a part of the first character appearing is visible.

“A second situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the character displayed second is displayed” is shown in FIG. 48(b). As shown in FIG. 89(b), and the second displayed character is not displayed in its entirety, but a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 89(b) As shown in , in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character that was initially displayed is not yet displayed. At the end of the display area that is visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and while the entire second displayed character is not yet displayed, the character is visible to the player. This includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears following the first character before the first character appears completely.

(2-2) In the group effect, the character displayed first and the character displayed second have different positional coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y axis, so it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 46).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be multiple characters, so it is possible to further prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group preview performance is output while the first character to be displayed in the group performance is being displayed, but the sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output before the display of the second character to be displayed starts. (For example, the example shown in FIG. 89).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group preview performance is output and the first character appears, thereby informing the player that the group preview performance has been executed. Since the start sound ends before the character appears, it is possible to suitably provide a group preview effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but ends by the time the second character appears. .

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include characters whose whole bodies are displayed within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies do not fit within the display area of the screen and characters whose whole bodies are displayed outside of the display area of the screen. includes a character that is displayed within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 44).

This allows more characters to appear in the group preview presentation in the limited display area.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character whose whole body is displayed within the display area of the screen, and the first character whose whole body is displayed within the display area of the screen, and the first character whose whole body is displayed within the display area of the screen. The first character is displayed in a mixture with the first character whose whole body does not fit within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 44).

Thereby, it is possible to create the illusion that more types of characters appear in the group preview presentation in the limited display area.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered by a blocking object (for example, the gaming machine frame 3), and the character that is first displayed in the group presentation is displayed at the position covered by the blocking object. starts, and then the display of the second displayed character starts,
Even when the screen is viewed while being covered by the shielding object, the first situation changes to the second situation in the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 48).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen that the player actually sees, there is no situation where only one person is displayed in a group preview effect, so there is no question as to whether or not it is a group preview effect, and only one person appears. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that this is not the case.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is viewed from the side between the screen and the shielding object, it is possible to view the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 48).

As a result, even if a player views the pachinko machine 1 from the side and sees the edge of the screen, there is no situation where only one player is displayed in the group preview presentation, so the group preview presentation It is possible to avoid questions such as whether or not this is true or not, or the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) At the design stage, a display related to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shielding object on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, a display related to the group effect is created on a screen of a predetermined size (for example, In order to be applicable to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches), a display related to the group effect is created up to an area corresponding to the large size.

Thereby, even if the design of the pachinko game machine 1 is suddenly changed to use a size larger than the predetermined size, the data of the created group preview effect can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include low importance characters (for example, maids C to F) that are less important in the content of the gaming machine, and characters that are more important than the low importance characters. Including high-importance characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the content of the gaming machine,
The high-importance character is displayed at a lower rate than the low-importance character, whose face does not fit within the display area of the screen and the parts of the whole body other than the face fit within the display area of the screen (for example, Example shown in 44).

Thereby, characters with high importance such as the main character can have their faces more easily recognized in the group preview presentation than characters with low importance such as supporting characters, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37) that executes a performance,
The effects executed by the effect execution means include a group effect (for example, a group preview effect shown in FIGS. 89 to 95) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42) period),
The group performance is a performance that displays the largest number of characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, in the group preview performance, the largest number of characters appear among all the performances, so it is possible to make the player aware that a variable display is being performed in which he can expect to win a jackpot.

"The group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group preview performance. Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, Among the performances that are executed during the period when the variable display based on the suspended memory of 1 is being performed, such as the performance when the symbol is displayed variablely, the performance when the reach is reached, the pseudo continuous performance, the performance when a jackpot occurs, etc. This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group preview performance. In addition, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of displayed characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" is executed during the jackpot game state or in the subsequent probability variable state or time saving state. Among the performances, the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen is the group preview performance. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect that has the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, This includes that the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance is the group preview performance. Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, Among the performances executed during the period when the variable display based on the suspended memory in 1 is being performed, such as the performance when the symbol is variablely displayed, the performance when the reach is reached, the pseudo continuous performance, the performance when the jackpot occurs, etc. This includes that the production with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens in the group preview production is included. In addition, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of displayed characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" is executed during the jackpot game state or in the subsequent probability variable state or time saving state. Among the performances, the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance is the group preview performance. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

(3-2) A performance in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group performance, and a specific performance in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, the second half of the SP reach or the final reach) is executed.

This makes it possible to perform a variety of performances, among which the largest number of characters can appear in the group preview performance.

Note that the specific performance may be a performance in which the number of types of characters to be displayed is greater than that of the group preview performance.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is greater than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

Thereby, a powerful performance can be shown to the player during the second display period, which is the longest period among the group preview performances.

Note that the number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group preview performance may be greater than the number of character types displayed in the specific performance.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42) period),
In the group performance,
An auxiliary display will be displayed to show that the character is progressing.
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character takes priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character When the display of the second character overlaps with the display of the second character, the display of the second character is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 45).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by providing an auxiliary display for characters, it is possible to show a more dynamic group preview effect to the player, but since the auxiliary display does not obstruct the visibility of other characters, it is possible to display more characters. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display that shows that the character is progressing. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, an image display that emphasizes that the character is progressing ( For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of the character's path (for example, an image display of the character's footprints), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example, an image display of the character's footprints). , an image display representing the character's aura). The "auxiliary display" may be any image display that is performed near the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The character display in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect have different layers displayed on the screen (for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the image of sand smoke is layer 1, the character images are placed in layers after layer 2).

Thereby, in the group preview performance, the character images and the auxiliary display can be suitably shown to the player.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10),
The video data corresponding to the group effect includes first character data (for example, video data of character C on layer 9) and second character data (for example, video data of character C on layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. video data),
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values regarding the moving speed of the character, but have the same animation parameter values regarding the character's motion.

As a result, even when changing the moving speed of the characters, by standardizing the animation parameter values related to the character's movements, it is possible to reduce the work steps involved in designing the group preview effect.

(4-4) In the group effect, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at the coordinates placed on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 43).

Thereby, since a plurality of characters do not move in the same way at the same position, it is possible to suitably show the group preview effect to the player.

(5-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42)) period),
In the first display period, the display of a newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 91).

The "newly displayed character" may be the second character that appears in the group preview presentation, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, or the character that appears third or later in the group preview presentation. It's okay. Considering that the group preview performance is a performance in which multiple characters advance as a group, the second character that appears in the group preview performance is the first character displayed as the "newly displayed character." It is preferable for the second character to appear immediately after the character to overtake the first character to create a sense of dynamism and realism.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Further, since the second character to appear disappears at the top, overtaking the first character to appear, it is possible to present a lively group preview performance to the player.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a character that overtakes other characters,
The number of overtaking characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the group preview presentation from becoming too complicated, and it is possible to present the group preview presentation with a sense of dynamism to the players. can be shown.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character, when the display of the overtaking character and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the overtaking character is smaller than the outline of the other character. (For example, the example shown in FIG. 47).

This allows the player to easily see how the character overtakes other characters.

(6-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Crowd preview performance) and
Executing a suggestion effect (for example, a PUSH effect) that displays a suggestion image (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!") that suggests the execution of the group effect. means (for example, processing for executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42) period),
The display of the suggestion image ends before the first display period in the group effect starts (for example, the example shown in FIG. 88).

The "suggestion image" may be any image as long as it suggests the execution of a group preview effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means as shown in FIG. 88. , it may be an effect image such as a light or pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of a group preview performance, or it may be a clock image in a timer performance that measures the time until the group preview performance is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image that suggests the execution of a group preview effect (for example, a character image of "Group"). In addition, in the timer performance, the time until the group preview performance is executed is measured using a clock image, and when the time measured reaches a predetermined time, a character image (the character "Group") indicating the execution of the group preview performance is displayed. (images) may also be displayed.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the character appears first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestion image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) ends, the display of the character starts for the first time in the first display period (for example, example shown in FIG. 88).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!"),
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operation means is operated during the display of the suggestion image ends before the display of the character starts for the first time in the first display period (for example, in FIG. 88 example shown in ).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-4) When the operation means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of performances including the group performance (for example, a six-person group preview, a background preview, a lamp preview) is executed. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 88, 97, and 98).

As a result, a plurality of performances are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(7-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Equipped with a group of people preview performance, a group of dogs preview performance shown in Figures 163 to 165),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42)) period),
The group performance includes a first group performance (for example, a six-person group preview performance) and a second group performance (for example, a dog group preview performance),
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect each advance at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1),
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each advance at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2),
the first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured such that the straight-line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 165). .

The "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in a group preview performance such as a six-person group preview performance or a dog group preview performance, as shown in Figure 165. This is the straight-line distance (distance along the X-axis) from the end of the character to the end of the character that is last displayed. This straight-line distance is determined by the time T, where T is the time from when the first character is displayed to when the last character is displayed from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and the speed of each character is V. It can be calculated by multiplying the speed V (T×V).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Furthermore, two types of group preview performances can be suitably shown to the players.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effects (for example, X1/V1) is the same or approximately the same as the execution time of the second group effects (for example, X2/V2) (for example, as shown in FIG. 165). example shown).

Thereby, two types of group preview effects can be executed using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than when the first group effect is executed,
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for dog group preview performances that have a lower execution probability and higher expectations than six-person group previews, by making the speed of the characters slower than for six-person group previews, for example, a player can take a picture of a character in a dog group preview performance. You can increase your chances of doing so.

(7-4) The degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the second group presentation are crowded (for example, density D2) is the degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the first group presentation are crowded (for example, density D2). degree D1).

Thereby, in the group preview performance, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and movement distance of the characters, so that it is possible to provide the player with a suitable group preview performance.

(7-5) In the second group production, a plurality of characters located at the end of the screen are arranged from the bottom to the top of the screen,
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, a display corresponding to the subsequent performance is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 164).

Thereby, it is possible to use the group preview performance as an opportunity to switch to an image for the next performance and show it to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, group effect execution processing shown in FIG. 37, Boingo shown in FIGS. 153-162 Equipped with a group preview performance),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen,
At a timing related to the first start of display of the character at the specific position, a preliminary display (for example, display of a preliminary image using a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the particular position difficult to see is performed (for example, , example shown in FIG. 153).

The "previous display" may be any display that makes it difficult to see the character, and may be any display that hides the specific position where the character appears (for example, display of effect images such as lights or patterns) etc.). "Difficult to see" refers to a state in which the player cannot see a specific position completely, a state in which the player can see a certain position but it is difficult to see it, a state in which the player can see a certain position but the character is not visible from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance of the character appearing cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize a specific position and can visually recognize the appearance of the character from the specific position, but it is difficult to visually recognize the character.

"Timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position" means the same timing as the first start of character display at a specific position, or the timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position. This includes timings within predetermined periods before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player is under the illusion that this is the timing at which the display of the character first starts at a specific position).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning at a certain size, which may cause an unnatural feeling such as a large character suddenly being displayed. to prevent players from experiencing this.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is displayed in an enlarged manner so as to progress from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen,
The enlarged character makes it difficult to see the character displayed at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 159).

This makes it possible to create a visual effect that makes it appear as if multiple characters are appearing one after another from a certain depth.

(8-3) The character that is displayed last in the group presentation is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end (example shown in FIG. 157). .

Thereby, it is possible to suitably switch to the performance after the group preview performance using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) In conjunction with the action of the character displayed last in the group performance, the background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent performance (for example, in FIG. 157 , example shown in FIG. 158).

Thereby, it is possible to suitably switch to the performance after the group preview performance using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group presentation is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end,
No other characters in the group effect are displayed on the back side of the last character displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 159).

As a result, even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image, and it is as if multiple characters are being placed one after another from a position with depth. It is possible to create a visual effect that makes it appear as if a character is appearing.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Crowd preview performance) and
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42) period),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound at a predetermined volume during the subsequent first display period. A specific volume is set higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to be the specific volume also in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume smaller than the specific volume in the third display period. The performance sound is output.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group preview performance at the specific volume even before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled to be raised or lowered by the sound output means, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but the volume increase or decrease is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. The volume may be raised or lowered depending on the sound.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the production sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the production sound rises to a specific volume is the fade-in time from when the volume of the production sound starts to decrease in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 51).

As a result, the sound in the group preview performance is faded in for a short time and faded out for a longer time than the fade in, so that the sound for the group preview performance can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Crowd preview performance) and
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, game effect lamps 9 such as frame lamps),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42) period),
A brightness data table composed of a plurality of brightness data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light is a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, a frame lamp shown in FIG. 57(a)). a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, a grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in FIG. 57(b)), and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. a data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W3 shown in FIG. 57(c));
Each of the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table includes first brightness data that is a combination of data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at low brightness and data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness. and a combination of data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at low brightness and data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness is configured with second brightness data different from the first brightness data (for example, as shown in FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 57),
The second luminance data table is set to cause more of the light emitting means to emit light with higher luminance than the first luminance data table (for example, the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps is the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps). High brightness (“0” to “F”) data is stored in more lamps than

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and since the second brightness data table is designed to cause the lamp to emit light at a higher brightness than the first brightness data table, In the second display period, weak footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear, and in the second display period, strong footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear one after another, providing a more suitable group preview effect to the player. can be provided.

"Data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at low brightness" and "data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness" are the data for the plurality of light emitting parts included in each light emitting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1, For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57(a), the data (100) of the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) at T1-1 is be. Note that, as RGB data, data corresponding to turning off is "000", data corresponding to low-intensity light emission is "100", and data corresponding to high-intensity light emission is "F00".

"Brightness data" is light emission data for each light emitting means (for example, frame lamp, panel lamp 9C) for each hour, and includes "data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at low brightness" and "data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness." For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57(a), this is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R at T1-1.

The brightness data table is a collection of "brightness data" for a predetermined period (for example, the light emission time specified in the parent table or child table), and for example, in the example shown in FIG. 57(a), T1-1 to T1- This is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R in No. 11.

(10-2) The first brightness data table has a longer brightness data switching interval than the second brightness data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals). , the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, it can be expressed that the character is running faster in the second display period than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the switching intervals of luminance data are at equal intervals, while in the second luminance data table, the switching intervals of luminance data are not equal (for example, as shown in FIG. 56). (The grandchild table W1 for frame lamps is switched at intervals of 100 msec, and the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec.)

Thereby, in the second display period, it is possible to express that a plurality of characters are running out of step, compared to the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-1) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for moving the light emitting point in the direction in which the characters advance in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps is It emits light at high brightness according to the direction of advance of the notice),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that does not move the light emitting point in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (glows depending on the brightness).

This makes it possible to represent a character appearing in the first display period and a plurality of characters appearing one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-2) The first brightness data table causes the light emitting means located near the character to emit light at high brightness in accordance with the advancing position of the character first displayed in the group effect, so that the character It includes brightness data that causes the light emitting means located near the unreached location to turn off or emit light at low brightness (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 57(a)).

As a result, the lamp will emit light at high brightness as the first character that is displayed at the front advances, and the lamp will turn off or emit light at low brightness in areas that it has not yet reached, so the lamp will not emit light. It can be used to express the progress of a character running at the front. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-3) The first brightness data table causes the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness, and then as the first character displayed in the group presentation progresses, the light emitting means is turned off or emitted at low brightness. It includes luminance data (for example, the example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 57(a)).

As a result, the lamp will emit high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp will turn off or emit low brightness in areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed. , the progress of the leading character can be expressed using the light emitted from the lamps. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-4) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness, and then causes the light emitting means located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group effect to emit light at high brightness. (For example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 57(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness, and then does not cause the light emitting means located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group effect to emit light at high brightness (for example, FIG. 57 (Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamps will emit high-intensity light as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamps will turn off in areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed. Alternatively, since the lamp emits light at low brightness, the progress of a character running at the front can be expressed using the light emitted from the lamp. Furthermore, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters advance one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-5) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness and turns off the light emitting means adjacent to the light emitting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 57(a) Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness and causes the light emitting means adjacent to the light emitting means to emit light (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in FIG. 57(b) example).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamps will emit high-intensity light as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamps will turn off in areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed. Alternatively, since the lamp emits light at low brightness, the progress of a character running at the front can be expressed using the light emitted from the lamp. Furthermore, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters advance one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(12-1) The third brightness data table includes brightness data for increasing the number of the light emitting means to be turned off in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, Table W3 is turned off or emitted at low brightness according to the direction of advance of the group notice).

Accordingly, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or emitted at low brightness as the character progresses, so it is possible to express the progress of the character using the lamp's turning off or light emission. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(12-3) The third brightness data table indicates that the switching interval of brightness data in the light emitting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the light emitting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located opposite to the direction in which the frame moves (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec) (The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to represent the character progressing from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappearing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, control of the light emitting means starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and control of the light emitting means ends during the first display period,
The second luminance data table indicates that the control of the light emitting means starts during the first display period, the control of the light emitting means continues during the second display period, and the control of the light emitting means starts during the third display period. control of the means ends;
In the third brightness data table, control of the light emitting means starts during the third display period (for example, an example of the group preview brightness data table shown in FIG. 80).

As a result, the lamp emits light at high brightness from the middle of the first display period in the same way as the second display period, so the progress of the character from before the second display period can be expressed by enlivening the progress of the lamp with the light emission of the lamp. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(13-2) The second luminance data table has a longer control period for the light emitting means than the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table,
In the first brightness data table, the control period of the light emitting means is set longer than in the third brightness data table (for example, the example of the group preview brightness data table shown in FIG. 80).

Thereby, the appearance of a plurality of characters appearing one after another in the first display period can be expressed with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(14-1) The brightness data first specified in the first brightness data table is brightness data that causes the plurality of light emitting means used in the group effect to turn off or emit light at low brightness (for example, as shown in FIG. 56). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the initial luminance data for all the lamps indicates that the lamps are off or emit light at low luminance).

As a result, the lamps will emit light when the group preview effect is executed after adding a break, without being mixed with the light emission of the lamps that was performed before the group preview effect is executed, making it more suitable. It is possible to provide a group preview performance.

(14-2) The brightness data initially specified in each of the second brightness data table and the third brightness data table is a brightness that does not cause the plurality of light emitting means used in the group effect to turn off or emit light at low brightness. data (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamp emits light at high brightness for the first brightness data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group preview effect has been executed, the player can watch the group preview effect without having to place emphasis on the flow of the effect and turn off all lamps or break up low-intensity light emissions. can be shown. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(14-3) The last luminance data specified in the third luminance data table is luminance data that causes the plurality of light emitting means used in the group effect to turn off or emit light at low luminance (for example, as shown in FIG. 56). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data for all the lamps indicates that the lamps are turned off or emitted at low luminance).

Thereby, when the group preview performance ends, all the lamps are turned off or emitted with low brightness, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize that the group preview performance has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(15-1) The first brightness data table is designed not to repeat brightness data with the same control content, while the second brightness data table is designed to repeat brightness data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 56, brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps.) brightness data is specified as follows).

This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(15-2) The third brightness data table is designed so as not to repeat brightness data with the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the same brightness data is not repeated in the frame lamp grandchild table W3). Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, with regard to the brightness data in the third display period, which is set to be shorter than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the brightness data as is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-1) The first brightness data table is designed not to repeat brightness data with the same control content, while the second brightness data table is designed to repeat brightness data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 56, brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps. The brightness data is specified as follows),
In the first luminance data table, the luminance data for troubleshooting is defined last, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data for troubleshooting is not defined last (for example, As shown in FIG. 56, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and 10-minute data for troubleshooting is not defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W2).

This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data in the first display period, the brightness data is specified as is, but instead, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is specified, so that troubleshooting can be done during that 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-2) The brightness data for troubleshooting is the brightness data for which the longest time has been specified among the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table, and the brightness data is the brightness data for which the longest time has been specified among the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table, and This is brightness data for preventing the light emitting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W1).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lamp light emission control from being performed from the beginning of the first brightness data table using the 10-minute data for troubleshooting, and therefore it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-3) The brightness data for troubleshooting is brightness data that causes the adjacent light emitting means to emit light in order and regularly (for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes The brightness data is brightness data that causes adjacent frame lamps to emit light in order and in a regular manner so that the light emitting points are shifted from the previous state).

As a result, even if a problem occurs, adjacent frame lamps are emitted regularly in order so that the light emitting point is shifted from the previous state, so it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming bad, and it is suitable. It is possible to provide a group preview performance.

(17-1) The light emitting means includes monochrome light emitting means that emits light in a single color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8), and multicolor light emitting means that emits light in a plurality of colors (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9). ~9C13),
The brightness data that causes the monochromatic light emitting means to emit light with a specific high brightness includes a specific value (for example, "6") as a value corresponding to the specific high brightness light emission,
The luminance data that causes the plurality of color light emitting means to emit light at the specific high luminance includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, "8" to "F") as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance light emission.

This makes it possible to adjust the variation in light between lamps that emit light at high brightness by setting an appropriate value for high-brightness light emission depending on the type of light emitting means, and to create a suitable group preview effect. can be provided.

(17-2) The monochromatic light emitting means includes a first color light emitting means that emits light in a first color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8), and a second color light emitting means that emits light in a second color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8). lamps 9B1 to 9B5);
Even if the luminance data causes either the first color light emitting means or the second color light emitting means to emit light at the specific high brightness, the specific value (for example, " 6”).

As a result, variations in light can be adjusted even between lamps that emit light in the same single color, and a suitable group preview effect can be provided.

(18-1) Both the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table include different brightness data for each of the light emitting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, in FIG. grandchild table for frame lamp shown),
The brightness data table used in a preview performance that is different from the group performance and foretells that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result is based on the luminance data table of the light emitting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine. Common brightness data is included for each (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 64).

As a result, in the group preview performance, by individually controlling the light emission of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, it is possible to realize a more detailed light emission mode, and it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. can.

(19-1) During the execution of a preview effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, the group effect interrupts. It may be executed with
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the light emitting means continues to emit light according to the brightness data table corresponding to the preview effect (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 166 and 167),
The light emitting means used in the group performance is the same as the light emitting means used in the preview performance, or includes the light emitting means used in the preview performance and the light emitting means not used in the preview performance. (For example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the reach line performance, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and attacker lamp, which are always used in the group preview performance, are not used).

As a result, even if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, since the common lamp is emitting light, the performance using light emission can be realized without any discomfort, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. be able to. For example, if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the lamps emitted in the group preview performance and the lamps emitted in the other preview performance will coexist, but if the lamps emitted in both If they are different from each other, a large number of lamps will emit light in a complicated manner, which will look bad and may give the player a sense of discomfort. In this regard, by making the lamps emit light in the group preview performance the same as the lamps in other preview performances, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from cumbersomely emitting light.

(19-2) The preview performance ends while the group performance is being executed, and a predetermined performance (for example, a symbol feeding performance) different from the preview performance is executed (for example, FIGS. 166 and 167). example shown),
The light emitting means used in the group effect is the same as the light emitting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the light emitting means used in the predetermined effect and the light emitting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 166 and 167).

As a result, even if the group preview performance is switched to another one, the common lamp is still emitting light, so it is possible to realize the light emission performance without any discomfort, and it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. .

(19-3) The group performance is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group preview lottery shown in FIG. 20).

As a result, whether or not to perform the group preview performance is decided by lottery regardless of other performances, so the processing load related to the execution of the group preview performance can be reduced, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. .

(20-1) The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
The specific light emitting means is capable of emitting light when controlling to the advantageous state, and does not emit light when not controlling to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is used for a round in a jackpot game state where V winnings can occur). It emits light to notify you that it is inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table do not include brightness data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light (for example, the example of the brightness data table shown in FIG. 56).

As a result, a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance will emit light during the group preview performance, causing the player to misunderstand that they have been controlled to an advantageous state such as winning the jackpot. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(20-2) The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, a stick controller lamp 9J, a trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group performance,
The specific light emitting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is valid by emitting light (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J emits light to prompt the player to pull the stick controller 31A, and when triggered The button lamp 9K emits light to prompt the user to press the push button 31B),
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table do not include brightness data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light (for example, the example of the brightness data table shown in FIG. 56).

As a result, a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters move in the group preview performance will emit light during the group preview performance, causing the player to misunderstand that the lamp is prompting the player to operate the operation means. This can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(21-1) An advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) is established based on the display result of the variable display of identification information (for example, symbols) becoming a specific display result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols). ) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled by
Group effect execution means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 Crowd preview performance) and
A specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display unit shown in FIG. 34) that executes a specific effect (for example, a conversation preview effect, a pseudo-sequence) in which the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result is lower than that of the group effect. (during display processing),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a37) to FIG. 95 (a42) period),
The variation in the identification information includes a first variation (for example, a previous variation) and a second variation after the first variation (for example, a subsequent variation),
The fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation is determined depending on whether the display result of the fluctuation display becomes the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. (determined depending on the time)
The fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation is determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the front fluctuation pattern is determined according to the rear fluctuation pattern),
The group effect is determined by a lottery using information regarding the second variation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the group preview effect is determined according to the subsequent variation number corresponding to the subsequent variation pattern. (determined by)
The specific performance is determined by lottery using information regarding the first variation without using information regarding the second variation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(d), (e), and (f) , the aspects of the conversation preview performance and the pseudo-relationship are determined according to the previous variation number corresponding to the previous variation pattern).

Specifically, the group preview performance is determined by a lottery using the post-change numbers corresponding to the post-change pattern, so that the normal reach, SP first half reach, SP second half reach, final reach, and jackpot in these reaches The expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot in the group preview performance can be set in detail according to the situation, such as the presence or absence of the event. On the other hand, the aspects of the conversation preview performance and pseudo-connection are determined by a lottery using the previous variation number corresponding to the previous variation pattern, without using the subsequent variation number, regardless of the type of reach. The amount of data used can be reduced. Therefore, by selecting a suitable lottery method depending on the type of performance, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(21-2) The specific performance (for example, a performance using a pseudo-link) is a performance that performs a re-variable display (for example, a pseudo-fluctuation) that temporarily stops the fluctuating display of the identification information and then restarts the fluctuating display of the identification information. It is.

This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data used in the lottery for determining the mode of pseudo-association.

(21-3) The specific performance is a performance related to a conversation preview by a character (for example, a conversation preview performance).

As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for a lottery for determining whether or not a conversation preview effect is to be executed, its type, and font color.

(21-4) The group effect includes information related to the first variation (for example, a previous variation number corresponding to a previous variation pattern) in addition to information related to the second variation (for example, a subsequent variation number corresponding to a subsequent variation pattern). ) will be determined by lottery.

As a result, the execution or non-execution of the group preview performance and its type are determined by lottery using the variation numbers that correspond to all variation patterns that are a set of the previous variation number and the subsequent variation number, so it is possible to In detail, the expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot in the group preview performance can be set.

(21-5) In the group presentation, a predetermined animation in which the characters move in the advancing direction is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 44, in the group preview presentation, an animation in which the characters run is displayed);
The plurality of images constituting the predetermined animation are:
A first image (for example, as shown in FIG. 174) in which the character's hand position (for example, the right hand position) is the first position located at the highest point in the character's advancing direction of the hand swing width in the predetermined animation. A second image (for example, image B and image C shown in FIG. 174) in which the character's hand position (for example, the right hand position) is at a second position close to the first position in the direction of movement. and the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is located at the highest point of the hand swing width in the predetermined animation on the side opposite to the direction of movement of the character, and is paired with the first position. A fourth image (for example, image F shown in FIG. 174) that is the fourth position, and a third image in which the character's hand position (for example, the right hand position) is close to the fourth position on the side opposite to the direction of movement. a third image serving as the position (for example, image D and image E shown in FIG. 174);
An image in which the character's hand position (for example, the right hand position) is between the intermediate position between the first position and the fourth position and the second position (for example, FIG. 175(g) (the image shown in FIG. 175(h)) and the image located between the intermediate position and the third position (for example, the image shown in FIG. 175(h)).

As a result, the group preview effect is an effect in which multiple characters run across the screen, and characteristic images such as image A (first image) and image F (fourth image) are used. , even if the images are thinned out by omitting some of the images between them, it can be shown to the player as a smooth animation. In this way, even if characteristic images are used and some images in between are omitted, a suitable group preview effect can be provided.

(21-6) The number of the plurality of images constituting the predetermined animation is an even number (for example, 6),
The first image and the fourth image are paired at an angle of the same absolute value (for example, 100 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character,
The second image and the third image are paired at an angle of the same absolute value (for example, 80 degrees or 90 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character.

The "pair" positions are both positions that are tilted by an angle of the same absolute value with respect to the vertical direction, which is an intermediate position.

(21-7) In the first image (for example, image A), the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction of the character on the advancing direction side,
In the second image (for example, image B, image C), the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is tilted 80 degrees or 90 degrees from the vertical direction of the character on the advancing direction side,
In the third image (for example, image D, image E), the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is tilted 80 degrees or 90 degrees from the vertical direction of the character on the opposite side,
In the fourth image (for example, image F), the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction of the character on the opposite side,
The position of the image between the intermediate position and the second position is a position tilted by an angle smaller than 10 degrees from the intermediate position,
The position of the image between the intermediate position and the third position is a position tilted by an angle smaller than 10 degrees from the intermediate position.

(21-8) In the group effect, a predetermined animation in which the characters run in the advancing direction is displayed,
The character that runs in the group performance (for example, character A (Yume-chan)) normally walks,
In the normal time, 30 frames of images of the walking character are used, and the walking character is always displayed,
In the group effect, a running character moves in and out of the frame, and the running character moves faster than the walking character in the normal situation.

In this way, when a character walks normally, the movement of the character is slower than during a group preview presentation, so unless more images are used than in the group preview presentation, the roughness of the animation will become noticeable. Thirty frames of images are used, but in the group preview presentation, the hand or foot movements are faster than the characters in normal times, so even if some images are omitted, it can be shown to the player as a smooth animation. This eliminates the need for designers to prepare many images.

(21-9) (2020-285) One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least the first image (for example, image A) and the second image (for example, image B, image C). configured,
In one period of the predetermined animation, the display time of the first image is longer than that of the second image (for example, image A has a larger number of frames than images B and C), and the first image has a longer display time than the second image. This is a more distinctive animation image than the two images.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group effect execution means is provided for executing a group effect for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the group effect, a predetermined animation in which the characters move in the advancing direction is displayed,
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image,
The first image is a more characteristic image representing the predetermined animation than the second image,
A display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than a display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.

As a result, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B or image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group preview effect stand out. A suitable group preview performance can be provided.

"Characteristic" animation images include images in which the hand (arm) is positioned at the angle where the angle from the vertical direction is the most inclined, as in this embodiment, which attracts more attention from the player than other images. This is an easy-to-understand image. In addition, the "characteristic" animation image is the first position where the character's hand is located at the highest point in the direction of movement of the character among the range of hand swings when the characters making up the group effect move. , and a fourth image that is at the fourth position located at the highest point on the side opposite to the direction of movement of the character. The first image and the fourth image, as shown in FIG. 171, are images at a position that is not included in (out of reach of) the width of the wave of a character walking on the liquid crystal during normal times. In addition, it is possible to apply the same idea to the feet of the characters (by comparing the characters that make up the group effect and the characters that normally walk on the LCD, it is possible to see that only the characters that make up the group effect can shake their legs). The image of the position (angle) is defined as the "characteristic image").

(21-10) The first image has the same display time as the fourth image (for example, a display time of 5 frames),
The first image and the fourth image have the longest display time among the plurality of images.

Thereby, the animation in the group preview performance can be made to stand out, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

(21-11) In the predetermined animation, one cycle of animation composed of a plurality of images (for example, one cycle of animation shown in FIG. 173) is repeated multiple times,
The plurality of images include the first image, the second image, the third image, and the fourth image,
One cycle is time-designed so that the first image, the second image, the third image, the fourth image, the third image, and the second image are displayed in this order,
The first image and the fourth image are displayed the longest.

Thereby, the animation in the group preview performance can be made to stand out, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

(21-12) In the case of an animation in which a character walks, the first image and the fourth image are not used,
In the case of the predetermined animation in which a character runs, the first image and the fourth image are used as characteristic images.

In this way, characteristic images such as image A and image F, in which the hand is raised the most, represent the characteristic part of the character running, and such characteristic images are It is not used for normal animations in which characters walk.

(21-13) (2020-286) The display layer of the group effect has a higher priority than the display layer of the reduced decorative pattern and has a lower priority than the display layer of the small pattern,
The predetermined animation of the group effect is displayed so as to pass over the front side of the reduced display decorative pattern (for example, the example shown in FIG. 45).
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is
The display means can variably display the first decoration identification information and variably display the second decoration identification information,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved;
It is possible to perform a group effect in which an image of a plurality of characters advancing as a group is displayed on the display means,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
The performance execution means is
Displaying the variable display of the first decoration identification information in a first size, and then displaying the variable display of the first decoration identification information in a second size smaller than the first size when executing the specific effect. death,
The variable display of the second decoration identification information is displayed in a third size smaller than the second size, and thereafter, even when executing the specific effect, the variable display of the second decoration identification information is displayed in the third size. Display in
When executing the group effect during execution of the specific effect, the characters forming the group effect in the second display period pass in front of the variable display of the first decoration identification information and the second decoration The group effect is executed so as to pass through the back side of the variable display of identification information.

As a result, the characters in the group preview performance are displayed as images passing in front of the reduced display decorative symbols, so that the group preview performance can be made more dynamic. On the other hand, since the image is displayed by the character in the group preview effect so as to pass through the back side of the small symbol, the visibility of the fluctuation of the symbols in the reach effect can be ensured, and the group preview effect can be suitably provided. Can be done. In addition, in this embodiment, during execution of a specific effect (for example, reach effect), the characters constituting the group effect in the second display period are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the first decoration identification information (for example, a reduced decorative pattern). , and the group effect is executed so as to pass through the back side of the variable display of the second decoration identification information (for example, the constant small pattern, the fourth pattern, etc.), but this event is limited to the second display period. Instead, it can occur similarly in the first display period and the third display period. That is, even in the first display period in which the characters forming the group effect only begin to appear, and in the third display period in which only the characters forming the group effect appear, the characters forming the group effect display the first decoration identification information. Because it passes through the front side of the variable display of the second decoration identification information (for example, a reduced decorative pattern) and the back side of the variable display of the second decoration identification information (for example, the permanent small pattern, the fourth pattern, etc.), the group It is possible to make the preview performance more dynamic.

(21-14) During the display period of the image in the group effect, the period in which the decorative pattern reduced and displayed by the display of the character in the group effect is hidden is longer than the period in which the decoration pattern reduced and displayed by the display of the character in the group effect is hidden. It is longer than the period when the pattern is not hidden.

As a result, the time during which the screen including the decorative pattern images is filled with characters in the group preview performance becomes longer, and the group preview performance can be made more dynamic.

(21-15) The display layer of the effect (for example, an image of sand smoke) applied to the character in the group effect has a higher priority than the display layer of the reduced-displayed decorative pattern.

Thereby, the effect image of the sand smoke in the group preview performance is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the reduced-displayed decorative pattern, so that the group preview performance can be made more dynamic.

(21-16) The display layer of the group effect is the same as the display layer of the cut-in effect that occurs during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect that determines whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result.

In this way, by providing an image for the cut-in display that is displayed on the same layer as the image for the group preview performance, separate from the display layer of the image for the group preview performance, any problems ( For example, even if a display problem occurs (such as an image in a group preview effect being displayed in front of the fourth symbol), the image in the group preview effect with the problem can be replaced with an image in the cut-in display. This allows you to eliminate problems with screen display.

[Modified example]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained.

(About the display period of group preview performances)
In this embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

Thereby, by making the character that first appears in the first display period appear longer, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the fact that the group preview effect suggesting a jackpot has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group preview performance)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a losing display result, there is a 100% probability that the group preview effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time, but this is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a losing display result, even if the group preview effect is executed with a higher probability in the second half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the variable display result is a winning display result, the group preview effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a 100% probability. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, even if the group preview effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the second half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group preview)
In this embodiment, the main character, Maid A (Yume-chan), appears as the first character in the first display period, but the character that appears most often in the second display period is the main character, Maid A. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

Thereby, the main character can be frequently shown to the player during the second display period, which is the longest, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the first character displayed in the first display period may be a premium character.

Thereby, the premium character can be shown to the player first in the first display period, and the group preview performance can be made to have an impact. Note that if the first character displayed in the first display period is a premium character, a jackpot may be determined. Furthermore, in this case, the light emission pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

Note that the premier character may be a character with the lowest appearance rate among all states and performances, or may be a character that does not appear except in group preview performances. Moreover, the premium character may be a character whose appearance suggests that there is a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than other characters.

(About light emission control in group preview presentation)
In this embodiment, the brightness data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 57, but the brightness data may be defined as follows. That is, first specific brightness data is a combination of data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at low brightness and data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness, and data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at low brightness. There is second specific luminance data that does not include data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at high luminance.The first luminance data table does not include the first specific luminescence data, and the second luminance data table has Specific light emission data may also be used.

In this way, data for emitting light at high brightness is not specified in the first display period, so it is possible to express the appearance of multiple characters approaching by emitting light from the lamp at low brightness. During the display period, data that emits light with high brightness is specified, so it is possible to express the progress of a plurality of characters one after another.

Further, the third brightness data table may include brightness data that turns off all the light emitting means that were emitting light in the second brightness data table.

In this way, the progress and disappearance of the character in the third display period can be expressed by turning off the lamp.

Further, the light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
A specific member that can transmit light is arranged on the front side of the specific light emitting means,
When the specific light emitting means emits light, the color that is visually recognized through the specific member becomes a specific color,
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table include brightness data that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a color different from the specific color,
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table may not include brightness data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light.

In this way, when the lamp located at the position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance emits light during the group preview performance, the light is emitted through the transparent specific member located on the front side of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the visually recognized color from being a specific color that is not used in the group preview presentation, thereby interfering with the color tone of the group preview presentation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(About the video data of the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, video data in which a character to be moved and the action content (action pattern) of the character are associated in advance is created at the design stage, and the video data was stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 plays back the video data stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It had become. However, the group preview presentation video may be played back using a method different from the above method.

For example, the data of the character to be acted upon and the data indicating the action details (movement pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 updates the character data and movement patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It may also be possible to select each of the data shown in FIG.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or ROM 121, a plurality of pieces of data in which characters A, B, and C each run or walk are stored in storage area 1, and a plurality of arbitrary pieces of data are stored, although the characters are not determined. What is necessary is to store in the storage area 2 video data showing a plurality of movement patterns of the characters related to the group preview performance, and the performance control CPU 120 stores the characters from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes. The video data related to the group preview performance may also be extracted from the storage area 2, the video data of one group preview performance may be created by combining them, and the created video data may be played back.

(Regarding cases where the group preview performance and other preview performances overlap)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 164, when the execution period of a group preview effect overlaps with the execution period of another preview effect, the display area of the image in the group preview effect is the same as that of the other preview effect. Larger than the image display area, and the image display in the group preview performance has priority over the display of images in other preview performances (for example, the layer of image display in the group preview performance is the same as the image display in other preview performances) layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the execution period of a group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of another preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the image display area of the other preview performance is The display may be given priority over the display of images in the group preview performance (for example, the layer of image display in other preview performances is on the front side of the layer of image display in the group preview performance). Alternatively, if the execution period of the group preview performance and the execution period of another preview performance overlap, the display area of the image in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the image display area of the other preview performance is The display may be given priority over the display of images in the group preview performance (for example, the layer of image display in other preview performances is on the front side of the layer of image display in the group preview performance). In addition, if the execution period of a group preview performance and the execution period of another preview performance overlap, the display area of the image in the other preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the image display area in the group preview performance is The display may be prioritized over the display of images in other preview effects (for example, the layer of image display in the group preview effect is in front of the layer of image display in other preview effects). In addition, when the display area of images in other preview performances is larger than the display area of images in the group preview performance, for example, for preview images that attract the attention of players, such as images suggesting a jackpot, the image display area in the group preview performance may Images that are hidden but located around the preview image (for example, images showing flames or an aura surrounding the preview image) include images that are not hidden by images in the group preview presentation and are visible.

(About images in group preview performances)
In this embodiment, images A to F are distinguished according to the position of the character's right hand (right arm) as shown in FIGS. 171 to 175, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, images A to F may be distinguished according to the position of the character's left hand (left arm), or images A to F may be distinguished according to the position of the character's right foot or left foot. Regarding the images A and F used in the group preview presentation, images A to F may be distinguished according to the position of any part of the character's body as long as it has a characteristic posture.

In this embodiment, images (for example, image A, image F) with characteristics are provided for parts of the character's body, but even if images with characteristics are provided regarding effects added to the character running away, good. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured as follows.

The predetermined animation includes an animation of a characteristic part related to the character's body (for example, hands and feet) and an effect related to the animation of the characteristic part (for example, a dust cloud added to the hand and foot),
In the predetermined animation, the characteristic image in the animation of the characteristic part takes the longest display time.

For example, an effect image of sand smoke is displayed as being added to a character running away, and while the effect image of sand smoke is displayed in characteristic images such as image A and image F, other images B to images In E, the effect image of sand smoke may not be displayed. Alternatively, for characteristic images such as image A and image F, an effect image that produces the most sand and smoke is displayed, while for other images B to E, effect images that produce only a small amount of sand and smoke are displayed. It may be displayed. In this way, images A and F, which are not used in normal times but are used in group preview effects, can be made more distinctive.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first image (image A) and the fourth image (image F) are images in which a part of the character's body is characteristic. The images to be added may be the characteristic first image (image A) or fourth image (image F). In this case, the character's body does not have to be distinctive; for example, the character's hand may be in the same position in all images A to F.

Note that the group preview effect is not limited to human characters, but may also be other moving objects (such as cars), and in this case, in the first image (image A) and the fourth image (image F), , sand smoke, etc. may be displayed, while the other images B to E may not display sand smoke effect images. Alternatively, for characteristic images such as image A and image F, an effect image that produces the most sand and smoke is displayed, while for other images B to E, effect images that produce only a small amount of sand and smoke are displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, in the group preview performance according to the present embodiment, an animation in which the characters run in the advancing direction is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the group preview presentation, the characters may swim in the advancing direction, and any animation in which the characters move in the advancing direction can be applied to the group preview presentation. In addition, if the character swims in the direction of movement in the group preview performance, for example, assuming a crawl, the position of the character's hand (for example, the right hand) is on the side of the character's movement direction within the hand swing width in the animation. The first image is the first position where the character's hand (for example, the right hand) extends the most in the animation, and the fourth position is the fourth position where the character's hand (for example, the right hand) extends the most in the direction opposite to the character. It may be 4 images. Further, if the characters swim in the direction of movement in the group preview presentation, the characters may also swim in the direction of movement in normal times. In this case, in the animation in the group preview performance, the first image and the fourth image as described above are displayed, while in the animation in normal times, the first image and the fourth image as described above are not displayed. It may be something.

<Description of invention using multiple configurations>
An invention that is equipped with the plurality of features described above and has a particularly synergistic effect will be described below.

[The first person is not completely visible, the animation parameter values are the same even if the speed is different (1)] (2020-287)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group effect execution means is provided for executing a group effect for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation appears in which part of the displayed character is displayed,
The character includes a first character and a second character,
An image in the group effect is configured by character data including data of the first character and data of the second character,
The data of the first character and the data of the second character have different parameter values regarding the character's movement speed, but have the same animation parameter values regarding the character's motion.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in a group preview performance, it is possible to avoid creating doubts as to whether or not this is a group preview performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can. Furthermore, even when changing the movement speed of a character, by standardizing the animation parameter values related to the character's movement, it is possible to reduce the work process in designing a group preview effect, and as a result, a suitable group preview effect can be created. can be provided.

[Relationship between fade-in and fade-out of group announcement sound and display period (2) where only the first person is not completely visible] (2020-288)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a group effect execution means for executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
Sound output means for outputting sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation appears in which part of the displayed character is displayed,
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound at a predetermined volume during the subsequent first display period. A specific volume is set higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to be the specific volume also in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume smaller than the specific volume in the third display period. The performance sound is output.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in a group preview performance, it is possible to avoid creating doubts as to whether or not this is a group preview performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can. Furthermore, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group preview performance with a specific volume even before the second display period. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Relationship between lamp scenario length and display period where only the first person is not completely visible (3)] (2020-289)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a group effect execution means for executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation appears in which part of the displayed character is displayed,
The brightness data table configured with a plurality of brightness data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light includes a first brightness data table, a second brightness data table, and a third brightness data table,
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period,
The control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first brightness data table is completed, and the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the third display period. was terminated in
The control of the light emitting means by the third brightness data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table ends.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in a group preview performance, it is possible to avoid creating doubts as to whether or not this is a group preview performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can. Furthermore, since the lamp emits light at high brightness from the middle of the first display period in the same way as the second display period, it is possible to express the progress of the character from before the second display period by enlivening the progress of the lamp with the light emission of the lamp. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Animation parameter values are the same even if the speed is different, relationship between fade-in and fade-out of group announcement sound and display period (4)] (2020-290)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a group effect execution means for executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
Sound output means for outputting sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound at a predetermined volume during the subsequent first display period. A specific volume is set higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to be the specific volume also in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume smaller than the specific volume in the third display period. Output the performance sound,
The character includes a first character and a second character,
An image in the group effect is configured by character data including data of the first character and data of the second character,
The data of the first character and the data of the second character have different parameter values regarding the character's movement speed, but have the same animation parameter values regarding the character's motion.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Further, even when changing the moving speed of the characters, by standardizing the animation parameter values related to the character's movements, it is possible to reduce the work steps involved in designing the group preview effect. Furthermore, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group preview performance with a specific volume even before the second display period. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

[Animation parameter values are the same even if the speed is different, relationship between ramp scenario length and display period (5)] (2020-291)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a group effect execution means for executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
An image in the group effect is configured by character data including first character data and second character data,
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values related to the movement speed of the character, but have the same animation parameter value related to the character motion,
The brightness data table configured with a plurality of brightness data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light includes a first brightness data table, a second brightness data table, and a third brightness data table,
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period,
The control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first brightness data table is completed, and the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the third display period. was terminated in
The control of the light emitting means by the third brightness data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table ends.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Further, even when changing the moving speed of the characters, by standardizing the animation parameter values related to the character's movements, it is possible to reduce the work steps involved in designing the group preview effect. Furthermore, since the lamp emits light at high brightness from the middle of the first display period in the same way as the second display period, it is possible to express the progress of the character from before the second display period by enlivening the progress of the lamp with the light emission of the lamp. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Relationship between group announcement sound fade-in and fade-out and display period, relationship between lamp scenario duration and display period (6)] (2020-292)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a group effect execution means for executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
multiple light emitting means;
Equipped with a sound output means for outputting sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
The brightness data table configured with a plurality of brightness data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light includes a first brightness data table, a second brightness data table, and a third brightness data table,
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period,
The control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first brightness data table is completed, and the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the third display period. was terminated in
The control of the light emitting means by the third brightness data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is completed,
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound at a predetermined volume during the subsequent first display period. A specific volume is set higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to be the specific volume also in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume smaller than the specific volume in the third display period. The performance sound is output.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group preview performance at the specific volume even before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the lamp emits light at high brightness from the middle of the first display period in the same way as the second display period, it is possible to express the progress of the character from before the second display period by enlivening the progress of the lamp with the light emission of the lamp. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Only the first person is not completely visible, and the display time of multiple image data that makes up the character animation is not uniform (7)] (2020-293)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group effect execution means is provided for executing a group effect for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation appears in which part of the displayed character is displayed,
In the group effect, a predetermined animation in which the characters move in the advancing direction is displayed,
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image,
The first image is a more characteristic image representing the predetermined animation than the second image,
A display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than a display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since there is no situation where only one person is displayed in a group preview performance, it is possible to avoid creating doubts as to whether or not this is a group preview performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can. Furthermore, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B or image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group preview presentation stand out. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[The animation parameter values are the same even if the speed is different; the display time of the multiple image data that makes up the character animation is not uniform (8)] (2020-294)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group effect execution means is provided for executing a group effect for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
An image in the group effect is configured by character data including first character data and second character data,
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values related to the movement speed of the character, but have the same animation parameter value related to the character motion,
In the group effect, a predetermined animation in which the characters move in the advancing direction is displayed,
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image,
The first image is a more characteristic image representing the predetermined animation than the second image,
A display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than a display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Further, even when changing the moving speed of the characters, by standardizing the animation parameter values related to the character's movements, it is possible to reduce the work steps involved in designing the group preview effect. Furthermore, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B or image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group preview presentation stand out. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Relationship between fade-in/fade-out of group announcement sound and display period, display time of multiple image data composing character animation is not uniform (9)] (2020-295)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a group effect execution means for executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
Sound output means for outputting sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound at a predetermined volume during the subsequent first display period. A specific volume is set higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to be the specific volume also in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume smaller than the specific volume in the third display period. Output the performance sound,
In the group effect, a predetermined animation in which the characters move in the advancing direction is displayed,
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image,
The first image is a more characteristic image representing the predetermined animation than the second image,
A display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than a display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group preview performance at the specific volume even before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B or image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group preview presentation stand out. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Relationship between lamp scenario length and display period, multiple image data composing character animation has uneven display time (10)] (2020-296)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a group effect execution means for executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
comprising a plurality of light emitting means,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
The brightness data table configured with a plurality of brightness data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light includes a first brightness data table, a second brightness data table, and a third brightness data table,
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period,
The control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first brightness data table is completed, and the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is started during the third display period. was terminated in
The control of the light emitting means by the third brightness data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second brightness data table is completed,
In the group effect, a predetermined animation in which the characters move in the advancing direction is displayed,
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image,
The first image is a more characteristic image representing the predetermined animation than the second image,
A display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than a display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.
[Effect] In the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since the lamp emits light at high brightness from the middle of the first display period in the same way as the second display period, it is possible to express the progress of the character from before the second display period by enlivening the progress of the lamp with the light emission of the lamp. can. Furthermore, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B or image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group preview presentation stand out. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(Example of time-saving control that does not involve hitting)
Next, as a time saving state, an example will be described in which time saving control is executed without going through a win (big hit, small hit, etc.).
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the characteristic parts and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base (state). In other words, as the time saving state, time saving control that does not involve winning (big hit, small winning, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Also, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, It is acceptable to win a prize in the winning opening (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) In addition, for winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and When using a small winning symbol random number, a specific small winning symbol random number can be used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a fall lottery judgment value in a time saving symbol lottery, a random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. , a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) depends on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Avoid changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Also, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times saved may be given differently depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times is set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) Furthermore, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state is finished after variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when the time-saving limiter function is installed and the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving symbols)
As other time saving control using time saving symbols, the following control may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the special symbol is displayed in the time-saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time-saving symbol being displayed, game control is not performed to move from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, the time-saving state is overwritten (time-saving It may also be possible to control switching of the gaming state so that it occurs again. Then, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol (For example, in the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general losing symbol is displayed.) Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B2) In a gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays a common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. Different symbols may be displayed as a display result depending on the time-saving state and the time-saving state (for example, in the normal state, the decorative design displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol, but in the time-saving state, it displays a simple losing symbol, etc.). (e.g., not displaying the pattern corresponding to the pattern). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display results of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is performed that suggests whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol); however, in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol It may be arranged not to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbols due to the performance in the time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is now different between the normal state and the time-saving state. May be controlled. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display of decorative symbols in a time-saving state, and can suppress a decline in game interest.

(B5) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time-saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (information that instructs right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, a variable display based on the stored pending memory information is displayed. Until it's all over. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B6) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. It's okay. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, and when the variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information is displayed. In the case of a hit (small hit, jackpot) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to the hit is different. It may be different. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining pending memory information stored when the time saving state ends, there is a common effect between when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no such pending memory information. It is possible to execute a different effect after executing (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth suspended memory information, a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed. possible). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after displaying the final surface result) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed may be the same. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to perform a common specific performance (reach performance, preview performance) in the case of a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a winning pattern or jackpot pattern, and in the case of a time-saving pattern (special display result), and multiple The proportion of time-saving symbols (special display results) may vary depending on which common specific performance is executed among the types of common specific performances. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, it is possible to suitably control the performance according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific performance, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). Thereby, variations in the performance results of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control uses a common fluctuation pattern in the case of a winning symbol (specific display result), the case of a time-saving symbol (special display result), and the case of a losing symbol (predetermined display result). Even if the production control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 can select a different production in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. may be made executable. As a result, variations in the effects of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved by the special performance after the execution of the common specific performance.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined performance different from the common specific performance (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a win (a display that has been moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) The expectation level (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) is made to differ depending on the performance mode of the display display that can suggest the expectation level of winning corresponding to the variable display of Good too. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special performance that can be executed when the time-saving design (special display result) occurs, after executing the performance (time-saving suggestion performance, etc.) that suggests the time-saving design (special display result), the winning symbol (specific It may also be possible to perform a performance (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than in a time-saving state) that notifies the player of the display result). As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can control the time-saving states (special states) in which the number of time-savings (time-saving continuation period) differs depending on the type of time-saving symbols (special display results) provided in plural types (for example, the (1st time saving symbol: 50 time savings, 2nd time saving symbol: 100 time savings, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 is given when the time saving symbol stops depending on the type of performance executed (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) It is also possible to perform effects with different number of time reductions (duration periods). As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention is drawn to the number of times that the game is shortened after that, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) Based on the pre-reading of the pending storage information, pre-reading of the pending storage information that has occurred after the pending storage information where it has been specified that a variable display that can be shifted (controlled) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) will be executed. Execution of the preview performance may be restricted. Then, as the pre-read preview performance while the execution of such a pre-read preview performance is restricted, a common mode of performance may be made possible. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B24) When the variable display whose prefetch target is based on pending memory information is a variable display in which a time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and when the variable display that is not displayed as if the time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the case of display and the case of display, the execution of a prefetch preview effect for pending storage information generated after the relevant pending storage information may be restricted. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, if the expectation level of the pending display color is blue < green < red, the color of the pending display is set to red. etc.). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using a variable number of displays that resulted in a predetermined display result, such as a variable display number of losers)
Next, an example of time saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of consecutive variable displays resulting in a loss) that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that does not become a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As shown below, the time saving state (special state) is when the number of consecutive variable displays with a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times). It may be possible to execute the following condition. Note that the predetermined result may be such that a time saving state (special state) can be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in a losing display result reaches a special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, the game is played based on the fact that the variable display result becomes the specific display result. The numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the user and that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is updated. Based on the above, when a special condition is established in which the number of executions (continuation number) of the variable display that resulted in the predetermined display result reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.), the normal state changes to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to transfer. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, even in situations where either the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained continues to be updated, making it easier for players to be relieved in a time-saving state. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player due to the time saving condition.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You can also do this. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (variable probability state, time saving state). This makes it possible to suitably rescue the player when display results that are disadvantageous to the player occur consecutively.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to bail out the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous situation, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time-saving state (special state) is executable, and the predetermined condition is may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when variable display is executed a special number of times. This makes it possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state substantially occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief to the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control to a time saving state (special state) for a period equal to or more than the special number of times (for example, further 1000 times or more, etc.); During the time saving state (special state), the time saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state); A different effect may be performed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shorter in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It becomes possible to change the appearance of the performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that, without performing such a performance, the same performance may be performed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming more aware of the fact that they are in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled to a second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. A third process for controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to separate the game balls into the first route (left side gaming area) and the second route (right side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit in the first route, and in the time saving state (special state), the game ball is hit in the second route. A game is played by hitting a game ball into a path. During execution of the third process, although the time saving state (special state) is not controlled, a notification to the effect that firing should be made to the second route (for example, a right-hand firing notification by a right-hand firing lamp, etc.) is made. You can also do this. Further, while the third process is being executed, a notification may be made to notify that the time saving state (special state) will be entered. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, by causing the right-handed lamp to emit light by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform a presentation that notifies the firing direction earlier (before the actual time-saving change starts) when actually transitioning to the time-saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, control to an advantageous state is given priority over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of special conditions, so the result is not more advantageous to the player, and the player's interest in playing is reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when variable display is started, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the numerical information becomes a specific value. After the variable display ends (the next variable starts, waiting for a customer), the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number, the special information (special number reached) flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information concerned is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). It's okay. Thereby, by managing the special information, control for transitioning to the time saving state (special state) can be suitably executed.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process regarding variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is established. A third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) depending on whether the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when in the special state. . This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easier. Then, by changing the command according to the game state identified at that time, the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) can execute suitable performance control according to the game state.

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a fourth numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated.

(C15) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special condition (variable number of display times). It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time saving state is reached after the end of the jackpot game state, a time saving state performance is performed in which the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time saving state is entered.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the above special condition (variable display number of times is It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C18) During the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (When a jackpot is over, the time saving state is performed with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time saving state is reached after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 stores predetermined information ( A ram clear command at the time of a cold start, a command notifying the number of fluctuation display until the end of the time saving state at the time of a hot start) can be sent to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, based on receiving the predetermined information, Suggestions regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effects that suggest that the number of times the variable display is executed are different in the morning, the background image is different, and that within 100 revolutions variation is far or near) are executed. (e.g. easy to execute). Since the player is given an incentive to play first thing in the morning, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information regarding the time saving state) to the performance control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 It may be possible to perform a special performance (such as a performance suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled into a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information) and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). Good too. Thereby, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss, and it is possible to suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The performance control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is satisfied based on the fact that variable display has been performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time-saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests that the control is to be performed, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times (for example, Suggestive effects can be executed every time variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances (such as different performances when shifting to the time saving state) are performed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of a condition. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(C23) It is possible to back up and store various data including the numerical information when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of conditions and after the time saving state (special state) is controlled (the performance after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview presentation may be made different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a loss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Each configuration regarding the characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined with a part or all of the configurations regarding other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but it is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine (for example, a big bonus, The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that are equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp , 10 General prize opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Audio control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st starting port switch, 22B 2nd starting port switch, 23 Count Switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball batting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passage gate, 50 4th pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
Reservation storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation storage,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform a group effect that displays an image of multiple characters progressing as a group,
When executing the group effect based on the first variation pattern, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a predetermined number of frames;
When executing the group effect based on the second variation pattern, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a specific number of frames different from a predetermined number of frames;
There is a first stage and a second stage with different production backgrounds,
In both the first stage and the second stage, if the specific reach suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, after the variable display starts, the variable display does not change to the specific display result. A gaming machine in which, during a predetermined period until a specific display result is suggested, the group performance starts in the first half of the predetermined period .

Images